Home

PARTNER Advanced Communications System

1. Figure 2 11 Labeling Jacks Follow these steps to label the line and extension jacks 1 Label the line jacks on the processor module beginning with 1 at the top line jack see Figure 2 11 2 Doone of the following a Fora 2 slot carrier label the line jacks on the other module b Fora 5 slot carrier label the line jacks on the other modules by starting with the leftmost module and ending with the rightmost module 3 Label the extension jacks on the processor module beginning with 10 at the topmost extension jack see Figure 2 11 4 Doone of the following a Fora 2 slot carrier label the extension jacks on the other module b For a 5 slot carrier label the extension jacks on the other modules by starting with the leftmost module and ending with the rightmost module Installing the Control Unit 2 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Grounding the System You ground the system by running a solid copper wire from the processor module to an appropriate earth ground Follow these steps to ground the system 1 Attach one end of a 12 AWG or 14 AWG solid copper wire to the grounding screw on the processor module see Figure 2 12 The length vee of the wire must not exceed 35 feet 7 6 meters 2 Route the wire through the wire manager on the front of the mod
2. Figure 2 1 Processor Module Clearance 3 Insert a 8 sheet metal screw into the screw hole at the top of the processor module see Figure 2 2 4 If you are installing a second module go to Step 5 If you are not installing a second module stand alone configuration a Insert another 8 sheet metal screw into the screw hole at the bottom of the module b Tighten the screws until the mounting tracks are snug against the wall There must be a 3 8 inch 1 cm gap between the wall and the rest of the module Do not overtighten the screws or the module will warp and fail to operate Figure 2 2 Screwing in a Processor Module c Goto the next procedure Labeling Jacks on page 2 11 Installing the Control Unit 2 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 Remove the clear plastic protectors from the connectors on the right side of the wall Tab mounted PARTNER ACS processor module i and the module to be added by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 2 3 Ay Gi Tab Figure 2 3 Removing the Plastic Protector 6 Slide the second module onto the PARTNER ACS processor module making sure the mounting tracks interlock see Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Module Mounting Tracks Inst
3. Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 18 Programming System Options Considerations After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions To restrict dialing specific telephone numbers enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 press QDOOWMOWE To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 900 1900 or O900 depending on the Toll Call Prefix required This setting tells the system whether a O for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when a toll prefix is required see Table 4 1 The table uses exchange 976 as the example Table 4 1 Preventing Dialing of Numbers in One Exchange When Toll Prefix Required Entry Restriction 976 Prevents local calls 1 976 Prevents direct dial calls to all area codes 0 976 Prevents operator assisted calls to all area codes 1976 Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code 0976 Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area c
4. Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Programming To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ O at extension 10 or 11 Enter two digits for the number of outside lines in the system to assign to all extensions or the main pool For example entering means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 or lines 1 through 6 are assigned to the main pool Select another procedure or exit programming mode Key Extensions In Key mode all extensions are Key extensions in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key by using Line Access Mode 313 are key extensions After you program the Number of Lines use the following features as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Line Assignment 301 to assign lines to specific extensions if the line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines from some extensions or to change the button used to pick up a line at a specific extension Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line star
5. Welcome Welcome to the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS This dynamic communications system comes complete with intuitive call handling combined with a variety of features that give you the efficient and flexible system you need The system also supports a full line of system telephones many with displays that show you programming and operation feedback But don t throw that old telephone away because the PARTNER ACS includes support for many single line telephones And you can connect many auxiliary devices such as fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners to the system The PARTNER ACS can operate in two modes Key and Hybrid and can also operate as part of a Centrex system With the system in Hybrid mode you can group lines into pools to provide faster routing of calls Supporting a number of voice messaging systems the PARTNER ACS ensures that incoming calls are always answered Welcome 1 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Structure of the Book This book contains eleven chapters which supply information as follows Chapter 1 Overview briefly describes the features modes of operation system capacities and system components Chapter 2 Installation intended primarily for the technician explains the physical installation of the control unit and the telephones Chapter 3 Initial System Programming describes the progra
6. na s ah od hee Rees dh wee oS cond Bed 4 24 Distinctive Ring 808 0 0000 cee 4 25 External Hotline 311 2 merenan e o 4 26 Forced Account GOdES esnan awoke Sia Saa 4 27 Groups of EXIGNSIONS ro oneal Ko Su DERE keke tase ke tes 4 30 Hold Disconnect Time 203 000 ccc eee 4 36 Hotline 603 ss cat aa Gane Pa ae hak en hard elect a hee end 4 37 Intercom Dial Tone 309 0 0c eee eee 4 38 Line Access Mode 313 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 39 Line Coverage Extension 208 0 0 c cece eee eet eens 4 40 Outside Conference Denial 109 0 cece eens 4 41 POOL Programming sata te wie ts Poth ded hee et cael ten aid 4 41 Recall Timer Duration 107 0 0 c cece eee 4 46 Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later oroat te o baune Naela a i eee 4 47 Ring on Transfer 119 0 000 4 48 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 ooooooccoooooooor ee 4 48 Star Code Dial Delay 410 0 0 0 cc cc eee eee nen 4 49 System Password 403 lt Sacha AAA ene Soe 4 51 System Reset Programming Saved 728 0 cece eee eee 4 52 System Speed Dial i ccaeincep bie dete edad a ae bead os 4 53 Toll Call Pronk 402 AA Re ei eee ae ee Ae eka Bar ea 4 54 Transfer Return Programm Seas sess weed eaeea pas Re ee 4 55 Unique Line Ringing 209 00 0 cee 4 57 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 ui se evi ee dae ee aa Pee ea eee oe 4 5
7. 8 43 Paging Feat re A A 8 44 Pivac AE A A E ae 8 47 Recall FOO iran arta ada ah e ha ba 8 48 Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later 00 cece eee eee 8 50 Redialig FSAtUTES unta aroha an e dao Bl BY Sele 8 51 senda als ptt Geet lett he ce te A Be Oe le rd ie Ores 8 54 Speed Dialing Features 0 0 cee tee 8 55 Station LOCK R21 eor saw ee PK6S Boas ead aE Hi tae ORR Ge a nee h 8 58 System Password 44 varieties Pid iaa dia 8 60 Touch Tone Enable F08 2 0 eens 8 61 VMS Cover F15 midi meshidedachaie vied sae da 8 62 Voice Interrupt Features 0 0 0 8 63 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 0 0 0 ccc ee ees 8 66 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment VII esse taste shia th hfe tid oe tn tale Pac cad at E Mk oe etd ae ae ate lah Be Tip Ring Device Requirements 000 cece ee eee ee eee ees iv Master TOC 10 11 Master Table of Contents Combination Extensions 0 44024 0444 v9 Wie wee ee ka A See ee oe ees 9 2 Answering Machines 22 si ia ri ic dir a ead 9 4 Auto Atendant xuxa ia A A A sie ae SS 9 7 Contact Closure Adjunct ca A A A A A SE5 9 9 Credit Gard Scanners varia bi rinks ates arias ibas dada as 9 12 Doorphone ProgramiMid ecos aio R s ad Lue 9 13 Fax Machines aaa e e ds iia hare 9 14 Loudspeaker Paging SysteM o ooooocccoocco eee 9 24 MOSS iis A AAA AAA a a Pn 9 25 O AA A eek ne 9 28 Night Service with Auxiliary EquipMenNt o ooooccoccocco e
8. Figure 8 5 Entry Erased Display You have several options at the Entry Erased Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record Caller ID Features 8 24 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m Press the A11 button to erase all call log records for this extension Dialing Instructions To dial the telephone number and return the call from the display 1 Press the Dial button on either the Telephone Number Display or the Name Display When you press the Dial button on either display the Dial Display appears see Figure 8 6 Select a Button to Dial 1 908 5551234 Back Figure 8 6 Call Log Dial Display 2 For Release 2 0 systems only if you want to make an outside call by using a specific pool press the idle pool button or press plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 If desired lift the handset 3 The button you press to dial the call depends on the number of digits you must dial to complete the call from your area m To dial the complete number including the 1 press the button under the 1 left button m To include the area code but not the 1 press the button under the area code the second button To dial the seven digit number only press the button under the seven digit t
9. 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 6 0 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active the factory setting Y m 2 Not Active 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Music On Hold Volume 614 Use this feature to select one of seven volume settings for the external music source provided through the Music On Hold jack on the processor module This setting is system wide Considerations m Changes to the Music On Hold Volume setting have immediate effect on all calls currently receiving Music On Hold treatment Programming To change the Music On Hold Volume setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 OQA at extension 10 or 11 The display shows the current setting 2 Press the number of the setting on the dialpad or press Wext Data or Prev Data until the correct setting appears Setting ranges from 1 to 7 with 4 being the factory setting 3 If you want to return the volume to the default setting press Remove Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment You can set up modems fax machines and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equi
10. Caller ID number or name of calling party if applicable m Coverage Call for XX on the display of users receiving a coverage call XX represents the number of the extension that activated call coverage m Forward xx xx on the display of users forwarding their calls The first xx represents the number of the user s extension the second xx represents the number of the destination extension m Wake Up Call on the display of users receiving a wake up call m Volume or display contrast level bars as volume or display contrast is adjusted m Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode Display 6 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Speed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed At idle extensions 10 and 11 only specific messages appear on the top line of the display instead of the usual day date message in the following circumstances Users at these two extensions should notify the System Manager when such a message appears ChgBat W PowerOn or ReplaceSysBat W Power On appears when processor module batteries need to be replaced The message may flicker on and off as the batteries near the low power threshold These batteries retain system programming settings during a power failure See Inserting Ba
11. ASA Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Automatic System Answer to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Automatic System Answer Button at extension 10 Using the Automatic System Answer Button Use the Automatic System Answer Button as a toggle button to turn ASA on or off When ASA is on the green light next to the button is on steady When ASA is off the green light goes off If you turn Automatic System Answer on when calls are ringing the calls are answered immediately by the system If you turn ASA off when calls are in the process of being answered the callers continue to hear the recorded message and are placed on hold Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Use this feature to specify the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by Automatic System Answer Considerations Automatic System Answer Delay works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at an extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Automatic System Answer Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call If you use Caller ID make sure Automatic System Answer Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured Automatic System Answer Features 7 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming a
12. Extension Name Display You can assign a name to your extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER telephones or up to 12 characters long on MLS telephones When that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call The System Administrator usually programs names for the extensions in the system However as the individual user you can change the name from your telephone See Extension Name Display on page 5 4 for more details Extension Name Display 8 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use External Hotline The System Administrator assigns the External Hotline to extensions When you pick up the handset of a single line telephone at one of these extensions a number is automatically dialed The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau Considerations m Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the External Hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the tip ring devices connected to your system dial out at the same time m Asingle line telephone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the External Hotline Using an External Hotline 1 Lift the handset of the Ext
13. Label the Night Service Button at extension 10 Using the Night Service Button To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service Button at extension 10 m l a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on To turn Night Service off 1 Press the Night Service Button at extension 10 m Ifa System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m If no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off Night Service Button 503 7 16 Operator Features Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Use this feature to program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room telephone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the telephone after the guest checks out Conversely an operator can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a conference room telephone from Local Only which prevents users from making long dis
14. Programming To change the System Day 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QOQA at extension 10 or 11 2 Change the day by pressing until the day entry you want appears m 1 Sunday factory setting w m 2 Monday m 3 Tuesday m 4 Wednesday m 5 Thursday m 6 Friday Setting the Date Day and Time 3 8 Initial System Programming m 7 Saturday 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Time 103 Use this feature to set the time that appears on system display telephones Considerations m Enter the time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are O 12 midnight to AQA 11 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary m The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation Programming To change the System Time 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter anew time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press OOO A display similar to the following appears System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15 p 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 Release 3 0 or Later This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes Tur
15. Select another procedure by using Next Procedure Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 20 Programming System Options Disallowed List Assignments 405 Use this feature to assign up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Considerations You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure m When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension the list applies to all lines to which the extension has access Programming To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 8 To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value appears m Assigned to extension m 2 Not Assigned to extension the factory setting Y Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another list for this extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the list number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Restriction 302 Use this feature to restrict an extension from receiving
16. Warranty Avaya Inc provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to the Limited Use Software License Agreement card provided with your package For addi tional warranty information see the PARTNER Customer Support Document Trademarks PARTNER PARTNER MAIL VS PARTNER MAIL MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 MDW 9030P and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the U S and other countries Ordering Information Call Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 1 317 322 6791 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 1 317 322 6699 Write Publications Center 2855 N Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 USA For additional documents refer to the PARTNER Customer Support Docu ment Customer Support If you need assistance when programming or using your system contact your local Authorized Dealer or call the helpline at 1 800 628 2888 Consultation charges may apply Obtaining Products See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support Document Documents on the Web For related documents go to www support lucent com A Important Safety Instructions The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be fol lowed when using your telephone equipment 1 Read and understand all instructions 2 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product 3 Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT
17. What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a shorter interval m f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect or if the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the shortest interval go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local telephone company does not send a hold release signal What to do Call your local telephone company and find out whether they send a hold release signal If the local telephone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover All Calls Disconnected Possible Cause 1 You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do This is normal behavior after running Restore Programming 125 the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours If you did not run Restore Programming 125 go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Power was interrupted to the control unit What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the on position O if you have a five slot carrier m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the helpline numb
18. end of one battery into the bottom clip and the positive end of the other battery into the top clip see Figure 2 14 Push to insert Figure 2 14 Inserting the Batteries Installing the Control Unit 2 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 With the locking latch in the unlocked position battery icon and minus icon visible slide the battery assembly into the processor module along the battery guides on the inside of the battery compartment see Figure 2 15 Push the battery assembly in far enough that the edges of the assembly slip behind the plastic housing of the processor module Figure 2 15 Sliding the Battery Assembly into the Processor Module 6 Pressing lightly on the battery icon on the front of the battery assembly slide the locking latch downward to secure the assembly in place The plus icon and the battery icon should now be visible on the front of the battery assembly see Figure 2 13 Initializing the System To initialize the system you must insert any PC Card before powering up the system The PC Cards contain the Backup Restore Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial ASA DXD PARTNER Voice Messaging Basics and software upgrade features In Release 3 0 the PC Card is called the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card NOTE You must power down the system before you insert or remove a PC Card Foll
19. oooooooooooooooooooooo 8 30 Do Not Disturb FOT 050 dic kt oye ean dir bated ies a dy 8 31 n CONSIAGTAHONS amp 03 k as we eae aR a Pee ee Ea eae we 8 31 PLOMO id whee eae eee ee Ree ane Se OES ak aes Say ees 8 32 a Using D Not DIStUID 2 2 esd esa ra Hew eas aad 8 32 Exclusive Hold F02 cocos etd gates ae As Pas ees wards 8 32 a CONSIDEIatIONS 43 s ash eee A A A Nea a ne eee eS 8 32 a Programming eiere TE 8 33 a Using Exclusive Hold tos ntareat fet ba baaa aria 8 33 Extension Name Display incitar Cena beh eet aaa wes veyed beats 8 33 External HotliNe sss ici AG Mute aqua ded aig ales SE ed cats 8 34 CONSISTE sa Gato eae Gs SE eed ile eee eka ee ee ere ot meee 8 34 a Using an External Hotline eis 4 44 ss 68s 84 a a ae 8 34 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 0 ee 8 34 a CONSIDEIAtIONS epn orreri Se oa eke Ree ea ee ree She Ra Ses A A 8 34 Programming e ER ee 8 35 Using Group Calling Ring Page on a System Telephone 8 35 Using Group Calling Ring Page on a Single Line Telephone 8 36 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal WALES EA AS A A TT Oe ar ee i ee eee a 8 37 a Considerations 0d on sie Se Se aed A hy ake ee 8 37 a PhOGAMMING iii Seen Vet a A Pe Skee AA 8 38 Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a System Telephone 8 38 Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a Single Line Telephone 8 39 Group Picktip IGGG 00 AAA A a ett ees oh 8 39 a
20. Press left Contact Closure 2 Press a programmable button Press Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press Station Lock Press a programmable button Press Direct Line Pickup Active Line Press a programmable button Press left Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button Press left Station Unlock Press a programmable button Press Direct Line Pickup Idle Line Press a programmable button with lights Press left Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press Dial a two digit extension number to ring extension or Dial plus the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension Press left Feature M Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press left Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press Dial optional two digit extension number Group Calling Ring Page For ringing group Press a programmable button Press left For paging group Press a programmable button Press left Message Light On Press a programmable button Press OO Dial optional two digit extension number Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Press a
21. 1 Do one of the following If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and Mic HFAN go on and you are active on the speakerphone If you want to call by using a specific pool on a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and Mic HFAN go on and you are active on the speakerphone 2 Press the Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The system automatically selects a line if you did not specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number The number being dialed appears on a display telephone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use Auto Dialing 8 6 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Background Music F19 Use this feature to provide background music through the speaker of an idle system telephone for your work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Considerations Background Music is available only if Music On Hold is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module m Background Music is available only on system telephones with speakers m The Bac
22. 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Doone of the following m Press the programmed button and dial the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access m Press and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Using Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line on a Single Line Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line on a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 and the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access Do Not Disturb F01 Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal You should use Do Not Disturb only if someone answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Considerations Do Not Disturb is available only on system telephones m Do Not Disturb requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the telephone will not ring m Use Do Not Disturb when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in
23. 2 Dial and the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I8LL Use this feature to access a specific outside line where LL is a system line number when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to the telephone Considerations m This procedure applies to individual lines If you have a pooled extension and you want to access lines in pools that are not assigned to your extension dial the pool access code at the intercom dial tone m Ifa line is in use you cannot access it with this feature you hear busy tone For information about accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line m If Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button 1 Press Feature D 0 2 Press a programmable button Direct Line Pickup Features 8 30 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 3 Press left Intercom 8 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line on a System Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line on a system telephone
24. 208 Use this feature to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for that line Considerations This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system m Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be owned by the same extension m This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice messaging system for Call Answer Service m This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card m Anextension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction or In Only m Use Call Coverage to redirect an extension s calls on owned lines to the covering extension m Use Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension m Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect the extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system To use Call Screening F25 the station must be the Line Coverage Exten
25. 4 Inthe other slots from left to right first install the 308EC or 206 modules followed by the 400 or 200 modules Align the module carefully in the appropriate slot For proper engagement of the connectors the module must be inserted straight into the carrier see Figure 2 10 Once the module is properly seated firmly push the center of the module until the connectors on the module lock into place A slight click indicates the connectors are engaged NOTE 308EC and 206 modules must be to the left of any 200 and 400 modules s Figure 2 10 Inserting a Module Z caution Do not force the module Use the carrier shelf as a reference and do not tilt slant or rotate the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it Installing the Control Unit 2 10 Installation Labeling Jacks After you have mounted the control unit on the wall you must label the line and extension jacks The line jacks are on the top of the modules and the extension jacks on the bottom see Figure 2 11 Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 308EC 2308EC Processor 2308EC Module Module Module Modules Module Modules HN Line Jacks Line Jacks Line Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks
26. Handling Calls 6 26 Using the Telephones m To make a voice signaled transfer to a system telephone in Step 2 of the procedure above press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller Ifyou hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the
27. PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Fax Line Saver If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line place the machine on its own extension see Figure 9 9 With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine A CONTROL U NIT Figure 9 9 Fax Line Saver When you answer a call and hear a fax machine signaling on the other end transfer the call to the fax machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line is automatically selected To Program To program a fax line saver setup 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the fax machine to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the fax machine to use to extension X 2 Doone of the following m If extension X is a key ext
28. The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Move the carrier s On Off switch to the On position Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit a fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide Make sure all modules are seated properly The cover will not fit if the modules are not seated properly To replace the cover grasp it by its upper edges and hold it squarely over the control unit Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place Tighten the screw on the lower front of the cover Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions As your business grows or changes so do your needs for your PARTNER ACS As you upgrade to newer releases you must program for new features As you expand you can add lines pools and extensions to your system Changing System Settings If you are upgrading to PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 or 2 0 or later from an earlier release by using the PC Card upgrade all of your system programming settings are converted to wor
29. To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 9 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears Regular dial tone the factory setting Y m 2 Machine outside line dial tone To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 4 38 Programming System Options Line Access Mode 313 Use this feature to identify individual extensions that are to operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid mode If an extension s Line Access Mode is changed to Key individual lines can be assigned to specific buttons on that extension s telephone regardless of whether they are part of a pool This feature applies only to systems of Release 2 0 or later that are configured for Hybrid mode Considerations Extension 10 operates as a key extension regardless of how the system is configured The Line Access Mode for extension 10 cannot be changed Users at extensions programmed as key extensions cannot access pools either by pressing pool buttons or by dialing pool access codes When an extension is changed from Pooled to Key any previously assigned po
30. Voice Interrupt features 8 63 Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 57 8 64 responding 8 65 using 8 64 Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 4 57 Voice Interrupt on Busy Call description 4 57 6 7 8 64 responding to a 8 65 Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls 6 9 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back 8 65 using 8 65 Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back light patterns 6 7 voice mailbox sending all calls to 8 54 Voice Mailbox Transfer 8 66 using 8 67 voice messaging system programming 9 40 voice messaging systems 1 12 8 18 9 39 Automated Attendant hours of operation 9 43 Call Screening 9 44 calls answered by Auto Attendant 9 42 listening to a caller leaving a message 9 44 programming VMS Cover Rings 9 41 VMS Hunt Delay 9 42 VMS Hunt Schedule 9 43 Index voicemail coverage turning on and off 8 62 Voice signaling 6 7 6 8 8 34 8 37 Volume Controls 6 3 W Wake Up Service using 7 21 Wake Up Service Button 7 20 Wake Up Service Button 115 7 20 wall mounting 2 4 2 8 2 slot carrier 2 5 stand alone processor module 2 5 wall mounting a telephone 2 21 Wildcard Character 4 29 wiring requirements 2 3 with direct connection 9 2 IN 13 Advan Cer a and Use Fiat ee E IN 14 Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the following sets of Flow Charts follow these instructions first Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension
31. 611 SMDR Talk Time 308 Distinctive Ring 612 Contact Closure Group 309 Intercom Dial Tone 613 Contact Closure Operation Type 310 Automatic VMS Cover 614 Music On Hold Volume 311 External Hotline 728 System Reset Programming Saved 312 Voice Interrupt on Busy 730 Remote Administration Password 313 Line Access Mode 1 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or earlier 2 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later 3 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 only 4 PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Cross Reference of Features Table A 2 Dial Code Features Dial Code Feature Dial Code Feature F01 Do Not Disturb F15 VMS Cover F02 Exclusive Hold F16 Caller ID Name Display F03 Recall F17 Caller ID Inspect F04 Save Number Redial F18 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F05 Last Number Redial F19 Background Music F06 Conference Drop F20 XX XX Call Coverage F07 Privacy F21 Station Lock F08 Touch Tone Enable F22 Station Unlock F09XX Message Light On F23 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F10XX Message Light Off F24 Record a Call 4 F11 XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F25 Call Screening 4 F12 Account Code Entry F41 Contact Closure 1 F13XX Manual Signaling beep or ring F42 Contact Closure 2 F13 XX Manual Signaling voice signal F59 System Release Status F14 Voice Mailbox Transfer 1 These features can be used by the telephone user and the System Administrator F represents the button represents the button XX represents a
32. At the Call Status display shown in Figure 8 4 you see the following information m At the left of the display you see the date and time of the call and either am or pm to indicate whether the call arrived in the morning or afternoon m The entry in the next column indicates the line that the call came in on Caller ID Features 8 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m The next entry a vertical handset symbol indicates whether the call was answered at the extension If the call was not answered this column is blank m Inthe next column indicates that a user attempted to use automatic dialing to return the call If no callback was attempted the column is blank 11 28 10 37am 101 Next Prev Erase More Figure 8 4 Call Status Display You have several options at this display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record m Press the Erase button to erase the log record see instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the Telephone Number Display Erasing Call Log Records When the Erase button is pressed on the Call Status Display Entry Erased appears see Figure 8 5 Entry Erased Next Prev All
33. Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection Press 4 Press the line pool or buttons in the desired order The valid entries for Automatic Line Selection depend upon the type of extension m Key Extension Outside system lines Left Intercom the factory setting v m Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 Left Intercom Right Intercom the factory setting Pools 881 883 individual lines For each button pressed a display similar to the following appears Automatic Line Selection To exit Automatic Line Selection press HG Press and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode Automatic Line Selection 5 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Name Display You can assign a name to an extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER telephones up to 12 characters long on MLS telephones Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Table 5 1 shows the valid character entries for Extension Name Display Table 5 1 Valid Character Entries Letters Numbers A 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 O 63 0 00 C 23 PEA 1 10 D 3
34. Dial a list 01 10 To add entry Dial the telephone up to 12 digits Press Press to remove a list entry Press to program another list entry System Flow Chart Groups Pickup Group Extension Dial Dial a group 1 4 Dial an extension 10 49 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press to program another extension Hunt Group Extensions Dial Dial a group 1 6 7 for VMS 8 for fax detection Rel 3 0 Dial a system extension 10 49 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press to program another extension Calling Group Extensions Dial Dial a group 1 4 Dial an extension 10 49 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press to program another extension Night Service Button Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select VMS Hunt Delay Dial OO Release 2 0 and earlier Dial 1 Immediate Y 2 Delayed Release 3 0 and later Dial 1 Day 2 Night Dial line number Dial 0 6 2Y Night Service Group Extensions Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press to program another extension VMS Hunt Sche
35. Manual 124 do not back up the System Date the System Day or the System Time Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Date System Day or System Time Be sure that the System Date System Day and System Time are set correctly before using backup procedures Setting the Date Day and Time 3 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Date 101 Use this feature to set the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display telephones when the telephone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Considerations m The System Date date stamps the backup files when you use Backup Programming Programming To change the System Date 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QOC at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter today s date in the form mmddyy month day and year including leading zeros for single digit months or days For example to enter April 26 2001 press OAO A display similar to the following appears System Date Data 042601 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Day 102 Release 2 0 and Earlier Use this feature to set the day of the week that appears on system display telephones NOTE System Day is not applicable to Release 3 0 or later systems In these releases the system calculates the day of the week for you by using System Date 101
36. Press a programmable button Press left Dial the two digit extension number Auto Dial Numbers Outside and Inside Press OO Press a programmable button To program an outside number Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions To program an extension number Press left Dial the extension number to ring the extension or plus the extension number to voice signal the extension Caller ID Call Logging amp Dialing Press a programmable button with lights Press Caller ID Inspect Press a programmable button with lights Press Caller ID Name Display Press a programmable button with lights Press Background Music Press a programmable button Press ma Conference Drop Press a programmable button Press OO Call Coverage Press a programmable button Press O Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number m PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart Continued Contact Closure 1 Press Press a programmable button Press Group Pickup Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button
37. System Program System Program 1 1 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter a different setting 1 9 2 is the factory setting To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode For Call Coverage Rings 320 Release 3 0 or Later 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 3 2 0 at extension 10 or 11 The current ring setting displays Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears 1 9 2 is the factory setting To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programming Although the Caller ID service itself requires no programming other system features enhance the use of Caller ID Caller ID Log Answered Calls Caller ID Call Log Line Association Caller ID Programming 4 8 Programming System Options ma Caller ID Log All Calls m Caller ID Type Caller ID Caller ID is available on system display telephones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number and name if available When active on a call you automatically
38. The System Administrator programs Voice Interrupt On Busy to identify extensions that can receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls You can use Voice Interrupt On Busy only from a system telephone Considerations The Voice Interrupt On Busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep If a Voice Interrupt On Busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead If you receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call and press Hola the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call Do one of the following To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a Voice Interrupt On Busy call has ended To resume your conversation with the third party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light Any party involved in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call cannot be involved in a second Voice Interrupt On Busy call until the first is finished The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The recipient s response is not heard by the third party You cannot receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at
39. Transfr Transfer Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold Spkr Speaker Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature Volume Control Buttons Press to decrease or to increase the volume as follows m To adjust ringer volume press while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker m To adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset m To adjust background music volume press while listening to music through the telephone s speaker Figure 6 2 shows the PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 telephones System Telephones 6 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use PARTNER 6 Line Programmable Buttons 4 E Intercom Buttons 2 Message Light j Er Feat Spkr E i 1 l I i I A gt Conf mor E Transfr Hold I PARTNER 18D EN A PARTNER 18 Di
40. description 8 48 switchhook use instead of 6 11 Recall Timer Duration 4 46 Recall Timer Duration 107 4 46 Record a Call 8 50 using 8 51 Redial last number 8 51 save number 8 53 Redialing features 8 51 release finding release number 11 2 Release 2 0 features 1 3 Release 3 0 features 1 3 Remote Access PC Card 3 1 Remote Administration Password 4 47 remote programming 3 6 remote use of the system A 6 REN Ringer Equivalence Number 9 2 REN see Ringer Equivalence Number reports A 9 requirements electrical 2 2 out of building installations 2 3 Resetting the System 4 52 resetting the system retaining programming 4 52 Restore problems 11 21 Restore Problems 11 18 Restore Programming 4 6 calls in progress effect on 4 6 restoring system programming 4 3 restricting access 4 42 Index Restriction line access 302 4 21 outgoing call 401 4 23 Restrictions Dialing emergency phone numbers 4 20 locking an extension 8 60 PBX Centrex services with 3 14 Retrieving a Held Call 8 40 Ring on Transfer 4 48 Ring on Transfer 119 4 48 Ring pattern 4 57 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 9 2 Ringer Volume Controls 6 3 Ringing Abbreviated 305 4 2 line 5 5 transfer 6 7 8 66 ringing changing patterns 4 25 lines 5 5 ring pattern 4 57 Transfer return number of rings 4 56 Ringing Patterns single line telephones 6 10 system telephones 6 7 ringing patterns 4 25 ringing ab
41. for example to access bank by telephone services If Dial Mode is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone Programming To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AAOC at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first line to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears m Touch Tone line the factory setting Y m 2 Rotary line To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change Select another procedure or exit programming mode Display Language 303 Use this feature to change the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display telephone The language is set for each extension so telephones in the same system can display different languages Dial Mode 201 4 24 Programming System
42. hold with Exclusive Hold If you have Caller ID you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed for active calls at your extension Privacy F07 8 47 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Privacy button _ Pd oO N Press Q Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature QO Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Privacy From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on Press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is on Recall F03 Use this feature to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Considerations m Using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call m Using Recall while recording an intercom call disconnects the call m Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone and then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service On a system telephone press a programmed button or
43. inside cover An ASA DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears Possible Cause You are attempting to record an Automatic System Answer message 1891 ora Direct Extension Dial DXD message 1892 and an ASA DXD PC card is not installed in the processor module What to do To clear the message at extension 10 program an Automatic System Answer 111 button if you used 1891 to try to record the greeting or a Direct Extension Dial 112 button if you used 1892 to try to record the greeting Press the programmed button to turn the feature on then press the programmed button to turn it off again After you turn the feature off the error message should be cleared and you can remove the button assignment using 111 or 112 Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines Are Disconnected Possible Cause Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Disconnect System Problems 11 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use What to do Change Automatic System Answer Mode 121 from Disconnect to either Hold or Ring m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines still get disconnected or the Automatic System Answer Mode already was set to Hold or Ring call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long
44. new extension amp repeat above steps 2 Area Code and only Allowed List Assignments Dial Dial a system extension Dial a list 1 8 System Password Dial Dial four digits to set the password Dial 1 Assigned Disallowed Phone Number Lists E e7Nolpesianed Ys Dial ress to program another list Dial a list 1 9 To program another extension Dial a list entry 01 1 0 Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps To add entry Dial the telephone up to 12 digits Press Press to remove a list entry Forced Account Code List Press to program another list entry Dial 6000 To program another extension Dial a list 01 99 Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a To add entry ae new extension amp repeat above steps Dial the account code up to 6 digits Press Press to remove a list entry Disallowed List Assignments Dial Dial a system extension Dial a list 1 8 Press to program another list Dial 1 Assigned Star Code Dial Delay 2 Not Assigned Y Dial 0 Press to program another list Dial 0 0 Seconds Delay Y To program another extension 1 1 Seconds Delay Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a 2 2 Seconds Delay new extension amp repeat above steps 3 3 Seconds Delay 4 4 Seconds Delay Emergency Phone Number Lists A TN Dial O
45. prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid Do one of the following m To copy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number m To copy another extension s settings press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions You can restrict outside calling from an extension by using these various features m Allowed Phone Number Lists m Allowed List Assignments m Disallowed Phone Number Lists m Disallowed List Assignments m Line Access Restriction m Outgoing Call Restriction Z security ALERT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System telephones give you more protection against such misuse than single line telephones Therefore you should install system telephones where restricting telephone use is important Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List Dialing Restrictio
46. prompt for the caller to enter more digits Usually the second dial tone is provided immediately but if the tone is delayed the caller should wait for the dial tone before continuing to dial The system Star Code Dial Delay 410 4 49 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use may not recognize the numbers dialed before the second dial tone which may cause the call to be misrouted Use the Star Code Dial Delay setting to force a delay in Auto Dialed calls after the star code so that the system waits to dial the rest of the digits until the second dial tone begins You can program an automatic pause of 0 to 5 seconds after each star code that is autodialed whether from a touch tone or a rotary telephone Considerations The Star Code Dial Delay is not inserted in manually dialed numbers If your central office provides the second dial tone immediately you do not need the delay provided by Star Code Dial Delay In this case choose the 0 setting to enable restriction checking but avoid the delay You can include star codes in Allowed Phone Number Lists and Disallowed Phone Number Lists Star Code Dial Delay settings apply to Auto Dialing Last Number Redial Personal Speed Dial numbers Save Number Redial and System Speed Dial numbers If Dial Mode 201 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set
47. system telephone 8 28 Contact Closure Adjunct connection 9 9 description 9 9 Contact Closure Device 9 35 Contact Closure Group 9 10 Contact Closure Operation Type 9 11 Control Unit definition 1 7 Control unit 2 8 control unit connecting lines and extensions 2 16 installation 2 4 wall mounting 2 4 Copy Settings 3 13 4 15 Copy Settings 399 3 13 copying settings 4 15 cover installation 2 18 covering calls 8 8 A 7 credit card scanners 9 12 Customer Self Service Center on the Internet 11 1 customize an extension 3 12 Cycle Programming Method 3 5 D Date setting 3 7 Date System 101 3 8 day setting 3 7 Day System 102 3 8 IN 3 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use Daylight Standard Times 3 9 desk mounting a telephone 2 18 Dial Mode 201 4 24 Dial Tone intercom 6 7 6 11 outside 6 7 6 11 recall 4 14 single line telephones 6 11 system phones 6 7 dial tone at an extension 4 38 dial tones 6 8 dial code features 8 2 Dialing from the display 8 25 dialing 8 57 A 5 Auto Dialing 8 4 Personal Speed Dial 8 55 toll calls 4 54 dialing quickly System Speed Dial 4 53 dialing restrictions overriding 8 60 overriding with password 4 51 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 16 4 23 PBX Centrex services with 3 14 Direct Department Calling see Hunt Groups Direct Extension Dial button 7 11 Lines 7 13 record playback 7 13 Direct Extension Dial Button
48. 000 02 cee eee 9 8 CONSI OS te oat O a a is at Ole cd 9 8 a PIOGFAMMING y Lira crak rta cl da 9 8 Contact Closure AdiUNCH vita ia ar A AA Di e 9 9 a Connecting the Contact Closure Adjunct 0 000 cece eee eee 9 9 Contact Closure Group 612 0 0 ccc eee eens 9 10 Contact Closure Operation Type 613 0 000 cee nee 9 11 Credit Card Scanners 52s sirio OG Dole Goa le O Pa a S Ra ai eS 9 12 a Using Credit Card Scanners ea dc Serge da ta ders alg aoe ew yee 5 eles 9 12 a Programming Credit Card Scanners 0 000 c cee tee 9 12 Doorphone Programming vi 3 rt bea eds A RA DR CeO haw ae 9 13 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 00000 c eee eee 9 13 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 00 9 14 Fax MachiN S nss bose acdsee ata yates da wears hea a ee a 9 14 Preventing Inappropriate Fax Answering 200000 eee eee eee 9 15 Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine 000 c eee eee 9 15 a Setting Up Fax Machines ag cwe estes oat we Be a tobe a Sake ee as 9 16 Using the Fax Management Feature o o occococococc es 9 21 a Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later 9 22 Fax Machine Extensions 601 oooooooooooo o 9 23 Loudspeaker Paging SysteM ooocccoccco tee 9 24 Mode MS aa Rie et a NA e ad 9 25 a Modem for Sending Calls ONlY ooooooccocccr eee 9 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications
49. 2 rings This allows the ICLID information to be detected before the call is sent to the Automated Attendant Voice Messaging Systems 9 42 Using Auxiliary Equipment Programming For Release 2 0 or Earlier To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 5 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m Immediate the factory setting w m Delay 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode For Release 3 0 or Later To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 5 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Select Day or Night mode by entering or 2 respectively the factory setting is 1 Day 3 Enter the line number The current setting is displayed 4 To set VMS Hunt Delay press until the appropriate value for the number of rings appears 0 6 2 is the factory setting 5 To set VMS Hunt Delay for another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Use this feature to determine whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day o
50. 32 2 Plug one end of the D8W line cord into the J1 jack on the adapter see Figure 2 32 3 Plug the other end of the D8W line cord into the IN jack on the bottom of the Autodialer see Figure 2 32 4 Plug the blue tinted connector labeled D8AC of the power cord into the jack on the power unit Z caution Use only the power unit supplied with the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer 5 Plug the other end clear tinted of the power cord into the J2 jack on the adapter 6 Plug the power unit into an electrical outlet 7 Plug the telephone s modular telephone cord LINE jack into the OUT jack on the bottom of the Autodialer Installing Telephones 2 24 Wall Jack Adapter f Q Power Outlet D8AC Cord Y D8W Cord IN OUT Modular Telephone Cord Figure 2 32 Connection of Cords for the Intercom Autodialer Installation 8 Place the Autodialer on the desk to the right of the telephone see Figure 2 33 9 Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet extension numbers and corresponding persons names Place the button sheet on the Autodialer and carefully replace the plastic cover 10 Adjust the height of the Autodialer to match the system telephone If you unplug the telephone NOTED connected to an Autodialer you must reset the Autodialer To do Figure 2 33 Sys
51. 34 call records wrap on printout 11 16 call reports 9 33 connecting to SMDR jack 9 35 ferrite core installing 9 35 including a Talk field 9 38 Output Format 9 34 programming 9 36 SMDR Output Format 9 38 SMDR Record Type 9 36 SMDR Talk Time 9 38 SMDR Top of Page 9 37 serial printers 9 34 specifying calls to be included 9 36 specifying number of digits for dialed numbers 9 38 Station Unlock 7 19 Support Customer 11 1 Swapping Extensions 10 14 Switchhook Flash 6 11 8 48 switchhook flash Recall 8 48 time of signal See Recall Duration Timer 4 46 system customizing A 8 initialization 2 14 system capacity 1 6 System clock 10 13 system components 1 7 system configurations 1 7 System Date 3 8 System Date 101 3 8 System Day 3 8 System Day 102 3 8 system modules 1 9 System Password 4 51 8 60 using 8 61 System Password 403 4 51 System Phones dial tones 6 7 lights 6 5 microphone 6 7 overview 1 11 programming Telephones see System Phones and Stan dard Phones ringing patterns 6 7 speaker 6 7 System phones programming mixed types D 1 System Problems 11 23 system problems 11 23 System Programming methods of 3 5 overview 3 1 PBX Centrex support for 3 14 system programming backup 4 3 restore 4 3 using 3 2 System Programming see also Programming System Programming Basics 3 1 system programming procedures A 1 System Release Status 11 2 system reset retain
52. 4 6 manual 124 11 20 Backup Programming Automatic 3 7 Backup Programming Manual 3 7 Backup Restore PC Card 4 4 inserting 4 4 problems with 11 19 removing 4 4 Backup Failure Alarm clearing 11 3 Batteries insertion 2 12 batteries 1 10 replacing 10 1 11 2 Bed and Breakfast Features outgoing call restriction button 114 7 17 wake up service button 115 7 20 bridging adapter 9 3 Busy Extension Indication see Light Patterns Busy Lamp Fields BLF Feature see Light Pat terns Button Locations for Programming at Extension 10 11 description 3 4 button programming operator extension 7 2 Buttons auto dial 7 2 Auto Dial PBX and Centrex Services with 3 15 intercom 1 4 6 5 line 1 4 system phone 1 4 C Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer 1 11 8 5 Call Coverage 1 3 8 8 identifying owner of outside line 4 40 using single line telephone 8 11 system telephone 8 10 Call Coverage 116 Rings 4 7 4 8 Call Coverage Rings 3 12 4 7 IN 2 programming for Release 2 0 4 8 programming for Release 3 0 or later 4 8 Call Follow Me description 8 11 8 14 light patterns 6 7 Call Forwarding description 8 11 8 14 light patterns 6 7 using single line telephone 8 13 system telephone 8 13 call handling 6 15 Call ID Logging and Dialing using 8 22 Call Intercept Feature 9 4 Call Log erasing records 8 24 Call Park 8 14 using single line telephone 8 15 system telephone 8 14 Call Pi
53. 6 meter at the bottom and left side Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals U S and Canada 90 264 VAC 47 63 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC 220 VAC fused at 10 Amps Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 a An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system b The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment c The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Evaluating the Environment 2 2 Installation Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Continued Specification Value Requirements for Out of Building Installations Wiring Safety Requirements Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the following In Range Out Of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and device from electrical surges System phone two IROB protector
54. 6 18 Intercom Dial Tone 4 38 Intercom Dial Tone 309 4 38 Internet Customer Self Service Center 11 1 interrupting calls 8 63 interrupting calls See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls IROB see In Range Out of Building Protectors IROB protector 9 2 Jacks types per module 3 2 jacks labeling 2 11 IN 6 Joining a Call 6 28 Joining calls on a Single Line Telephone 6 29 System Telephone 6 29 K key extensions adding new lines 10 13 definition 1 5 setup 3 11 Key Mode 1 4 language changing 4 24 Language Display 303 4 24 language for displays 4 24 Last Number Dial See Last Number Redial Last Number Redial 8 51 using single line telephone 8 52 system telephone 8 52 LEDs checking for proper functioning 2 15 Light Patterns 6 5 description of 6 5 intercom auto dial button 7 2 Line adding to system 10 13 assigning to extensions 3 10 buttons 6 1 jacks 3 2 restricting use at individual extension 4 21 Line Access Mode 4 39 Line Access Restriction 302 4 21 Line Coverage Extension 3 12 4 40 Line Coverage Extension 208 4 40 Line Ringing 5 5 Line Selection Automatic 5 2 lines 3 10 adding new lines 10 13 assigning to pools 4 45 testing 2 17 Lines and extensions connecting 2 16 Lines Number of 104 3 10 Lists allowed phone numbers 4 16 disallowed phone numbers 4 18 forced account codes 4 29 locking your extension 8 58 logging Caller ID calls see Caller ID Loggi
55. 7 11 using 7 12 Direct Extension Dial Delay 7 13 Direct Extension Dial features 7 9 Direct Line Pickup active line 8 29 Direct Line Pickup features 8 29 Direct Line Pickup Active Line using single line telephone 8 30 system telephone 8 30 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line 8 30 using single line telephone 8 31 system telephone 8 31 Direct Programming Method 3 5 Disallowed List Assignments 405 4 21 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 4 18 Display 6 13 assigning aname to 5 4 8 33 extension name 6 14 display extension name 8 33 showing low power 11 6 Display Language 3 13 4 24 Display Language 303 4 24 display on the telephone 6 2 Display Phone IN 4 for programming 3 1 3 6 5 1 Distinctive Ring 4 25 Distinctive Ring 308 4 25 Do Not Disturb 8 31 description 8 31 using 8 32 doorphone programming 9 13 Doorphone Alert Extensions 9 13 Doorphone Extension 9 14 Doorphones doorphone alert extensions 606 9 13 doorphone extensions 604 605 9 14 programming for 9 13 9 14 Dropping Parties from a Conference Call 6 24 Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters 9 2 Emergency Phone Number List 3 15 environmental requirements 2 2 Exclusive Hold 8 32 using 8 33 Extension copying settings 3 13 4 15 customizing an 3 12 jacks 3 2 programming 3 12 programming from 3 1 swapping 10 14 transfer return 4 55 Extension 10 11 3 1 5 1 button locations for programming 3 4 progr
56. A 5 Call Coverage Features Cross Reference of Features Page Activity For Feature Name Covering calls As a member of a group All Call Coverage 8 8 And you want to adjust the number of All Call Coverage Rings 4 7 times calls ring before going to coverage Having your calls covered Occasionally All Call Forwarding 8 11 Call Follow Me By voice mail All Automatic VMS Cover 9 40 VMS Cover 8 62 Regularly All Call Coverage 8 8 Table A 6 Calling Privileges and Restrictions Features Activity For Feature Name Page Preventing people from making calls To your extension All except Privacy 8 47 operators Do Not Disturb 8 31 To outside numbers System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 Managers Disallowed List Assignments 4 21 only Outgoing Call Restriction 4 23 To toll numbers System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 Managers Outgoing Call Restrictions 4 23 only To certain numbers or area codes System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 Managers only Outside of normal business hours System Night Service Group Extensions 4 34 Managers only Allowing calls To certain numbers or area codes System Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 16 Managers Allowed List Assignments 4 18 only System Speed Dial 4 53 Outside of normal business hours System Night Service Group Extensions 4 34 Managers only PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and U
57. A Oe 6 8 a Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone 00000 cee eee eee 6 8 single Line Telephones vv ia di thew a 6 10 a Ringing Patterns cenicero tds 6 10 A A RN AN 6 11 a Using the Switchhook catar las 6 11 a Single Line Telephone Limitations s an anaa ee 6 11 a Feature Telephones oooooooocor 6 12 Displays ir caus ES a aes Ree ee teas Saye oud 6 13 Handling GallS do eones and tm ar e Aided rita Gears 6 15 Making Calls sica hag aie e tees Ae Ae etree ait den eS elated anata 6 15 w Answering Calls cause nae be oa aay ace we ee e Ro eo 6 19 a Placing Calls on Hold 2 tet er a okies etl ne hc cant ea oh Ae 6 21 x Conterence Calls ecane bi brass Pond eae Shwe en da 6 23 s Transferring GallS oido Shae s s ia wacked lao owls Secs 6 25 a JOINING CallS ari A PRES E eee es ee a eee 6 28 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use Using the Telephones Overview This chapter explains how system and single line telephones work with the system The buttons on the telephones are discussed as well as the basic call handling features and the display System Telephones PARTNER telephones have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they work For information about an MLC 6 MLS or TransTalk 9000 series telephone see the documentation that came with the telephone Buttons and Indicators PARTNER telephones have fixed buttons that are al
58. Backup Failed Write Prot m Backup Failed Check Card m Backup Failed SystemBusy m Backup Failed InsertCard See Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for an explanation of these messages and suggested corrective actions and for the procedure for clearing the Backup Failure Alarm message Programming To change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 1 Check that only one Backup Restore PC Card is in the processor module 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 6 6 at extension 10 or 11 The current setting appears Backup and Restore 4 4 3 4 Programming System Options To change the setting press Wext Data or Prev Data until the setting you want appears or press to return the setting to the factory setting The possible settings are m Active m 2 Not Active the factory setting Y 3 Backup Alarm Cleared Exit programming mode For information about using Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Backup Programming Manual 124 Use this feature to manually back up all the programming except the system date day and time to a Backup Restore PC Card Programming To begin a manual backup of system settings 1 2 Verify that only one Backup Restore Card is in the processor module Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQAA at extension 10 or 11 If there i
59. CONSIDSTATONS tc oe ees fe deta ihe stat a ee Wes Oe ds tetas 8 40 a PROGFAMMING scort he oe the a wA eee sad Bebe eee ears Se 8 40 Contents Using Group Pickup on a System Telephone 00 cece e eee eee 8 40 Using Group Pickup on a Single Line Telephone 0 000e ee eee 8 40 HON a aches a Rangers AT aa 8 41 a CONSIGEIALIONS e AA EE ARA ERA A A Roe 8 41 Using a Hotline Telephone 2 000 eee es 8 41 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 2 eee 8 41 a CONSIdSTationS cars Atle Bde ee ORE ae a ee De ds aot 8 41 cele AA of Ct LEM SE RA ee A Beg ek eh er hl ie AA te oh ee 8 42 a Using Manual Signaling sn rta rar os paa ee oe see 8 42 Message Light On FO9XX and Message Light Off F10XX 8 43 a GONSIDSrAtIONS rupias pulsada dare dara faved bbs 8 43 a PIOGFAMMING y terror pue its a ae ee id a Ot Veda towed 8 43 Using Message Light Off on a System Telephone oocccoccccoco 8 44 Using Message Light Off on a Single Line Telephone o ooccooccoooo o 8 44 Paging ROAtUrOS aii a yt ee Kees ee ae ee Ee AS 8 44 a Loudspeaker Paging I70 i2 f2 ewe a civ ned SEs ee Pere Ree eee Ee See ee 8 44 a Simultaneous Paging I 70 cortar eds geet ae ee nnd a eee 8 46 Privacy ROL coe sci oe Shania aude ham ae ned Sent a ae Me oar a ee SR ale MS 8 47 a CONSIDEIATIONS eigse 2c al ean el ta 8 47 a PROGIAMIMING 5 Sues ton on AS E cee Se ea es 8 48 a USING PIIVACY corista tak Ed ae kee de ean b
60. Dial two digits 01 80 to set length of a switchook flash 18 450 msec Wake Up Service Button Sif Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select Button then press a Rotary Dialing Timeout Dial Dial 1 4 sec 2 8 sec Y 3 12 sec Call Coverage Rings Dial O Dial 1 9 2 0 only VMS Cover Rings Dial Dial 1 9 3Y l System Reset Programming 7 Saved IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period _ Dial O E Ring On Transfer Dial O Dial 1 Active Y 2 Not Active Automatic System Answer Mode Dial Dial 1 Hold Y 2 Disconnect 3 ring Caller ID Type Dial Dial 1 USA Y 2 Singapore Backup Programming Automatic Dial Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y 3 Backup Alarm Cleared Backup Programming Manual Dial Press Enter to begin the backup Restore Programming Dial Dial 1 MAN mmddy Y 2 AUTO mmddyy Press Enter to begin the backup Automatic Daylight Standard Times Dial Dial 1 Active Y 2 Not Active System Flow Chart System Speed Dial Numbers To program a number Press OO to enter programming mode Press Dial a three digit code 600 699 Dial the telephone number up to 28 digits including special chara
61. Extensions 4 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then program the PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAILs Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes it as a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group With PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system Do not assign any other extensions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures see Voice Messaging Systems on page 9 39 and the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set the Transfer Return Extension 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax machines Do not assign any other extensions to this group See Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later on page 9 22 of this guide Programming To assign extensions to a Hunt Group _ Pp N Press
62. F02 Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any telephone in the system This type of hold typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because it allows the user to retrieve a call without having to know which line the call is on Callers on hold hear Music On Hold 602 only if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Single line telephone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 316 is programmed for their extensions Using Hold on a System Telephone Follow these instructions to place and retrieve a call on hold on a system telephone To place a call on hold on a system telephone press Hola The green light next to the intercom line or pool button winks To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press intercom line or pool button next to the winking green light 2 Ifthe handset is in the cradle lift it up or press Sek You are reconnected to the held call The green light next to the line or pool button changes to on steady To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the button next to the winking red light or press intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Using Hold on a Single Line Telephone Follow these instructions to place and retrieve a call on hold on a system telephone To place a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly Han
63. Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ 0 5 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 8 Enter the desired extension number To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting Y Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Groups of Extensions 4 32 Programming System Options Group Call Distribution 206 Use this feature to assign outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used for fax transfer and detection Considerations m Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group m Incoming calls hunt for an available extension in a circular manner Ifa Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which co
64. Flutter short on short off A call is on Exclusive Hold at your extension and can only be retrieved from your extension A call on a line in the pool is on Exclusive Hold at your extension and can be retrieved only from your Caller ID Inspect is on or a Wake Up Service call is being scheduled from extension 10 A call transferred to the extension programmed on the button is now returning to your telephone or you extension are being manually signaled by the extension Red Broken Fax Management Flutter short on only the fax off long off extension is not answering calls may be out of paper 1 Applies to Caller ID Name Display Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button Privacy Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back and VMS Cover all of which require programming on a button with lights Can also apply to Account Code Entry Background Music and Call Forwarding Call Follow Me if any of them are programmed on a button with lights Ringing Patterns System telephones have these ringing patterns m An outside call ring ring ring Release 3 0 or later see Unique Line Ringing 209 on page 4 57 m An intercom call ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP If you have a system display telephone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appears on the display A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ri
65. LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit m Ifthe LED lights the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Possible Cause 2 The green LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out m If the LEDs light the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Problems 11 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard central office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the line quality m Ifthe device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Problems with System The following procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered e
66. Modules Overview A system must contain a processor module A 2 slot or 5 slot system also contains line extension modules Processor Module The PARTNER ACS processor module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for three outside lines eight enhanced tip ring extensions a Music On Hold audio source a loudspeaker paging system a grounding screw a jack that supports an adjunct for two Contact Closures and a jack for a call reporting SMDR device such as a printer The processor module also has two PC Card slots a two color red and green light emitting diode LED and two AAA user replaceable batteries The module provides support for integrated Caller ID information on system display telephones The system requires one processor module Line Extension Modules Table 1 3 shows the line extension modules used in the PARTNER ACS Table 1 3 Line Extension Modules Name Line Jacks Extension Jacks Additional Information 200 206E 206EC 400E 400EC 2 2 0 6 No longer available You can connect telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Green power indicator No longer available You can connect telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Supports Caller ID Green power indicator No longer available Green power indicator Supports Caller ID System Compone
67. Personal Speed Dial on a Single Line Telephone You can dial Personal Speed Dial on a single line telephone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Speed Dialing Features 8 56 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 2 Press 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number System Speed Dial Use this feature to dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 The System Administrator has programmed up to 100 frequently used numbers as System Speed Dial numbers Any user on the system can dial these numbers Considerations System Speed Dial numbers cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and System Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or System Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another System Speed Dial number to dial the account code System Speed Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing a single button System Speed Dial cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Using System Speed Dial on a Sy
68. Power down and remove the upgrade PC card when you upgrade from Release 1 0 to Release 2 0 8 If you have a 2 slot carrier or a stand alone configuration you are finished with this procedure If you have a 5 slot carrier continue with Step 9 9 Make sure all modules are seated properly The cover will not fit if the modules are not seated properly 10 To replace the cover grasp it by its upper edges and hold it squarely over the control unit see Figure 10 3 Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place Using a PC Card 10 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use Figure 10 3 Replacing the Cover 11 Tighten the screw on the lower front of the cover Adding New Modules Adding new modules to an existing 5 slot carrier is very similar to installing the control unit NOTE Use these instructions if you are adding modules to an existing 5 slot carrier If you are upgrading from a stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module to a 2 slot carrier see Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 for instructions Z caution Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 Follow these steps to add a module to an existing 5 slot carrier Move the On Off switch to the Off position O Remove the po
69. Programming and Use Table A 4 Basic Calling and Answering Features Continued Activity For Feature or Function Page A voice mail box System Voice Mailbox Transfer 8 66 telephones Paging Several people at your company who All Simultaneous Paging 8 46 have speakerphones Over your company s loudspeaker All Loudspeaker Paging 8 44 system Prevent or allow voice announced calls System Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 57 from coming in over your speakerphone telephones Putting a call on hold At your own extension so that you can All Hold 6 21 pick it up At your own extension so that you or All Hold 6 21 someone who shares a line can pick it up At your own extension so that anyone All Call Park 8 14 can pick it up after you page them At your own extension so that only you System Exclusive Hold 8 32 can pick it up telephones Using the system from an outside telephone To program the system from a location N A Remote Administration 4 47 outside the system Password To receive calls that come to your N A Call Forwarding 8 11 system extension Call Follow Me Leaving messages Let a co worker with a system telephone System Manual Signaling 8 41 know that you wish to speak with him or telephones her without calling Receiving messages Turn off Message light All Message Light Off 8 43 telephones with Message Waiting lights Table
70. Shed Se beG se Osea eee Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11 Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information mo Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Record a Call Light is Always Red Steady and You Cant Record a Call ia sowie tea cee ee haw edema da a MLC 6 Telephone Does Not RINQ oooccoccccco o Single Line Telephone Problems 000 cece eee eee ene a Single Line Telephone Does Not Ring 0200 ee eae Single Line Telephone Rings Back after Intercom Call with No One at Other End 00 5 a Single Line Telephone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Other Telephone Problems 0000 cee ee ence o a Trouble Making Outside Calls 0000 cee eee Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions 00000 eee eee eee a Calls Are Answered Automatically o oooooccooocccon o Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer 00000 eee eens Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted 0 0 00 eee ee ee eee PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use
71. System Installation Programming and Use a Send and Receive Mode MusiG On Hold erie rat al Ae a MD dir a Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source 000 cee eee eee a Music On Holdi 602 ai iui eigen a peep hears aap ive Saks a Music On Hold Volume 614 0 000 ccc eee eee Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 0 00 00 cee eee a OPPO QIAN y sie aota og Gh ante ele atone atk A Nase he aha ae dogo EE brgh Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 0000 eee eee eee a Gonsiderati ns e rat AAA Se aE aa Pasa whe as Wie a Call Repos a iv aise A ae eee a Le A E Output FO Matar cruda rn bata fa cae a Serial Prite S ccc oct oaks Ganka Pade wee awe dea Ok RAR Oe EAEE ee h a Call Accounting Devices ees eae Vie bee ee ata a Connecting a Device to the SMDR Jack uuan annaa aea a SMDR Programming 242528440 cabins Aten thee oot oh oe te ae Ae Ate ago Voice Messaging Systems 0 cect tees a To Programa VMS eera does Pew etiny AER A ad a Additional VMS Programming 0 0 0 cece eee a PFOGlaMMING 14 5 340246 head dida eee abe haa tae a save ESAS e Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview You can use various auxiliary equipment with the PARTNER ACS The connection and the programming for the following equipment is explained in this chapter Answering Machines Contact Closure Adjuncts Credit Card Scanners Fax Machines Modems Music On Hold Station Message Detai
72. You hear intercom dial tone 1 Do one of the following To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system telephone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To manually transfer a call to a Hunt Group While on a call press rans 2 Dial and a group number 1 8 1 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 8 38 Programming amp Using Telephone Features The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a Single Line Telephone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Do one of the following m To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension m To make a voice sig
73. a a a o o l o J O K O L o Y E Z O O O O a E a E a G a A pn Intercom O O O O O GY a a B a C a D Oo o Figure D 1 Programming from a PARTNER 34 D Telephone Programming Mixed Telephone Types PARTNER 6 Phone Qa O oC oD o mi O O O o o o Intercom Intercom Ext O Message MLS 34D Overlay PARTNER 18D 18 Phone Next Next Mm m Procedure m ltem m Data m Remove Mm sal N pe pl pe pe pe LS LS LS LS Ls LS Prev Prev Prev ee m Procedure m ltem m Data m_ Enter m aree e eres LS U U LS LS U M B N P 0 l P k AA BB Ly Ly Ly E Ly Ly GG HH IT JJ m m m m m m SCM ICN MO SER T J K L Y Z a i y Ls Lf Ls LS Ei a 1 a J a K g i M mMm F g 5 n A E Syst Central SLE ALE ALG SH U U U U Program Tel Program 2 E a il a z a foe fee SCA 805 800 80 A B Cc D LS LS LS Ls a g Ext Message Intercom Intercom Feature J PARTNER 34D Phone e a Wild SY 6G HH i JD SEE aU 560 sW elx Slee Pp oca BER 609 elt Cec cee SCM SCN 8607 CP SAA LZ SLG BCA sH BEJI sK 5L SA B 80
74. a caller dials an extension that is associated with the Caller ID Logging feature the call is logged as unanswered if it is not answered at the extension m To prevent unauthorized persons from viewing the log Caller ID calls cannot be viewed at a locked station m The date and time of an incoming call is logged from the central office Therefore the date and time of the call that you see on the system display telephone may be different from the date and time reported in the SMDR report for the extension m You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Examples The examples below show how unanswered Caller ID information is logged Line 6 is associated with extensions 11 and 12 for call logging If a central office call rings and is not answered on line 6 it is logged as unanswered on extensions 11 and 12 If itis answered it is logged only if the answering extension has been programmed to log answered calls or to log all calls Line 5 is associated with extension 11 for call logging A user at extension 11 answers a call transfers it to extension 12 and the caller hangs up before it is answered The call is logged as unanswered at extension 12 When a call is answered it is not logged unless the system has been programmed to log answered calls by using Caller ID Log Answered Calls or an extension is programmed to answer all calls by using Caller ID Log Line Assignment and Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID Featu
75. a system telephone 6 16 Calling Group 4 30 Calling Group Extensions 4 30 Calling Group Extensions 502 4 30 calls answering with Call Pickup 8 15 interrupting 8 63 interrupting See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls joining 6 28 parking 8 14 placing on hold 6 21 restricting A 7 transferring 6 25 transferring to voice mailbox 8 66 Capacities System 1 6 Centralized Telephone Programming 3 1 3 6 Centralized Telephone programming 3 1 Changing System Settings 3 1 3 14 Clock changing system 3 8 3 9 clock changing system 10 13 CNG detection 9 22 combination extension problems telephone does not work 11 15 Combination Extensions 9 2 combination extensions problems 11 15 Components batteries 1 10 capacity 1 6 description 1 7 modules 1 9 PC Card slot 1 10 telephones 1 11 1 12 Components System description 1 7 Conference call making a 6 23 Index conf button 6 23 dropping a participant 8 26 limiting outside parties 4 41 outside restriction 4 41 Single Line Telephone 6 24 System Telephone 6 24 Conference Drop 8 26 using single line telephone 8 27 system telephone 8 27 Configurations 2 Slot 1 7 5 Slot 1 7 extensions maximum 1 9 lines maximum 1 6 overview 1 7 connecting an Intercom Autodialer 2 24 connecting lines and extensions 2 16 connecting telephone cords 2 17 Contact Closure 8 27 length of operation 9 11 setting up 9 35 using single line telephone 8 28
76. addition the system logs the line the call came in on whether the log entry was viewed whether the call was answered or not answered and whether an attempt was made to return the call by using the Dialing option Caller ID Features 8 20 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Considerations m This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for the MLS MLC TransTalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones m Any users who have system display telephones and have lines with Caller ID can view and dial the numbers of logged Caller ID calls You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active m To view the Caller ID Call Log you must program a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button on a button with lights on a system display telephone This feature is not supported on a button without lights m All unanswered Caller ID calls that are transferred to another extension are logged at that extension Caller ID calls transferred to a group are logged at every extension that alerts in the group if no one in the group answers the call However if a user answers the call at any extension in the group it is not logged as unanswered at any extension m Ifa Caller ID call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature and the caller hangs up without dialing an extension the call is not logged at any extension However if
77. after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 before it transfer returns Programming To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension _ AOUN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 Dial the number of the originating extension Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Rings 105 Use this feature which applies to all system extensions to define the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extension Considerations m If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer m The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up m If you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings Programming To ch
78. and the solutions to these problems This book also contains four appendices Appendix A Cross Reference of Feature Codes contains a table cross referencing the most commonly used features and tables of feature codes arranged numerically Appendix B Special Characters describes the unique characters entered via the dialpad into strings of dialed numbers Appendix C Speed Dial Form contains a form for users to enter both Personal and System Speed Dial numbers Appendix D Programming Mixed Telephone Types describes for the System Administrator how to program MLS telephones with a PARTNER telephone and vice versa Structure of the Book 1 2 Overview Features As each new version of system software is released more valuable features become available Features Available with Release 2 0 or Later Automatic System Answer to help answer and route calls Direct Extension Dial to allow callers to dial an extension or help group directly without the aid of the receptionist m Line Pooling to create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When users access a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Call Coverage for users who are unable to answer their calls but want their calls answered by another individual Caller ID Logging and Dialing feature for users to view the names and numbers of logged calls from system telephones Users can press the Dial option to auto
79. are replacing the processor module go to Step 7 If you are replacing the top module continue with Step 6 7 Mount the new module by following the steps in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 then go to Step 9 8 Remove the screw at the top of the processor module and remove the module from the wall see Figure 10 10 Replacing Modules 10 8 Upgrading the System Figure 10 10 Removing the Top Screw 9 Mount the new PARTNER ACS processor module by following the instructions in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 and Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 12 earlier in this guide 10 Mount or remount the top module by following the steps in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 11 Connect the line and extension cords one at a time making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module See Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 12 Reconnect the power cord Z caution The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Replacing Modules in a 5 Slot Carrier Replacing a module in a 5 slot carrier involves many of the steps used in installing the modules Z caut
80. be programmed 3 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active answered calls logged m 2 Not active answered calls are not logged the factory setting Y 4 To set Call ID Log Answered Calls for another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Release 2 0 or Later Use this feature to associate lines with extensions for the purposes of logging unanswered Caller ID calls You can associate multiple lines with an extension and multiple extensions with the same line Caller ID calls can be logged only if they ring on an extension that is associated with a line that has been programmed for Call Logging NOTE Caller ID Call Log Line Association is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones Considerations m Use Caller ID Call Log Line Association to associate lines with the one extension that will log all calls Then use Caller ID Log All Calls 319 to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines m Itis not necessary to associate lines and extensions to log unanswered transferred calls Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically Programming To associate a line with an extension for the purpose of l
81. by using the fax machine that is connected to his or her telephone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to your fax extension Tell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before sending the fax There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension m Press the Fax Management button When the fax machine answers hang up Fax Machines 9 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m If you do not have a Fax Management button press plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up On a standard telephone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold Then dial the fax extension number and hang up m f you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press Transm then Intercom 7 7 plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up NOTE If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system you can program its Automated Attendant Service to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines Setting Up Fax Machines There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax num
82. call and then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m To transfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press Trans r or Next Item this takes the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page For an extension that has a system telephone you can program plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them Transferring a Call on a Single Line Telephone Follow these instructions to transfer a call by using a single line telephone m To transfer a call to another extension 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call and then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Handling Calls 6 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing If no one answers the call rings back at your extension
83. call while the message is playing the light for the call is steady red To intercept the call press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Ring the line button on which an outside call rings flashes green continuously even while the system answers the call and plays the Automatic System Answer greeting To answer the call lift the handset If the message was playing it stops automatically Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 Programming To change the Automatic System Answer Mode 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQB To change the mode press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Hold the factory setting Y m 2 Disconnect m 3 Ring Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Features 7 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Use this feature to record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by Automatic System Answer The maximum length of the message is 20 seconds Considerations m f you do not record a message for Automatic System Answer calls are placed on hold continue to ring or are discon
84. can be made on all lines at an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed To change the type of call restriction press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction can make toll local and intercom calls this is the factory setting w m 2 Inside intercom Only m 3 Local intercom and local Only For Hong Kong Release 3 0 the values are 1 No Restriction m 2 Inside intercom Only Allows calls to emergency number 999 3 Local intercom and local Only Cannot dial numbers beginning with 17 001 or 002 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Mode 201 Use this feature to identify individual lines as touch tone or rotary Check with your local telephone company if you are not sure which type of line is being provided to you Considerations If you are having difficulty using touch tone telephones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 If the system has rotary lines you can use Touch Tone Enable F08 to send touch tone signals over a rotary line
85. can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number For system telephones and most single line telephones you can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns System display telephones can also display the type of call that is ringing at the extension See Ringing Patterns on page 6 10 There are no unique ringing patterns for coverage calls or forwarded calls You can join a call in progress at another extension as long as Privacy F07 is not on for that extension see Joining Calls You can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at any extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup I6XX and Group Pickup 166G You can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user s telephone You can program the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 feature on a button with lights to respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify single line telephone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone and a second incoming call Answering Calls Ringing at Your Extension The way you answer a call varies depending on whether you are using a system telephone or a single line telephone Handling Calls 6 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications Syst
86. centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it Call Answering If the operator should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Set Line Ringing for all lines at extension 10 to the desired number of Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring In Hybrid mode Immediate Call Answering is the factory setting Lines are assigned as individual line buttons on the telephone at extension 10 and all pool buttons assigned to users extensions are set to No Ring Backup Call Answering If the operator should answer some lines only when a user does not pick up set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to Delayed Ring set the lines or pools assigned at each user s extension to Immediate Ring No Answering If some lines should not be picked up by the operator at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use Line Assignment 301 to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case set Line Access Restriction 302 to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the operator from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines Overview 7 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Backup Answering Options To assist the operator in handling calls consider the following features Automatic System Answer When act
87. create a list of valid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If the code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If the code is invalid the system denies the user access to an outside line For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Dial number See Auto Dialing System Speed Dial and Personal Speed Dial for programming instructions Programming To program an Account Code Entry button Press Du Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press Feature Q Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Account Code Entry To enter or change an optional account code 1 From a system telephone if a password is programmed for the system enter it before lifting the handset After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature Q 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code by doing one of the following m Dial the account code manually by using the telephone s dialpad Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the
88. fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer Fax Machines 9 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To Program Fax 1 Send Ext X To program the send fax machine 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A m If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X Do one of the following m f extension X is a key extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first line A selected last m f extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select pools and outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines and pools to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension X use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify exte
89. for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that telephone receives a group page you must lift the handset or press Wic HFAl to answer the page m Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manually or by using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group m You can program a Group Calling button on a system telephone to ring or page a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch m When a call is transferred to a Calling Group and the call is not answered it goes back to the specified Transfer Return Extension 306 The call must be ringing not a voice page m Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging Programming To program a Calling Group button 1 2 3 Press o0 Press a programmable button Do one of the following m If you want calls to ring the group press left niercom 7 m f you want calls to page the group press left Intercom 7 Buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Calling Ring Page on a System Telephone To use the programmed button To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed button first then lift the handset Ifyou ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring If you
90. if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate for all lines in the pool m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Pool Access Restriction 315 for the extension m f someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Pool Access Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The pool may not be assigned to the extension What to do Check Pool Extension Assignment 314 to see if the pool is assigned to the extension m Ifthe pool is not assigned assign it m If the pool is assigned go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Not enough lines are assigned to the pool to support usage What to do Check Pool Line Assignment 207 to see if an appropriate number of lines are assigned to the pool m If an appropriate number of lines are not ass
91. indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call by using a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted Handling Calls 6 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications Seen metalation Poara and Use Handling Calls 6 30 Operator Features 7 Contents OVEIVIEW a a a Ste A aN ae ke Wa ask ak RO ee E ey ek aR as 7 1 Programming an Operator s Extension 0 00 00 cece eee 7 1 Call Handling OPON S isis 3 200 3402 aces es oes hanes tae adead a EAA 7 1 Backup Answering Options 000 cece eee teens 7 2 a Button Programming css rs aoe ee dot Eo 7 2 Automatic System Answer Features o oooooccocooco ee 7 3 s C nsiderationS Gir 5 4x 55 co evant tae ea A ARA Ee A PE EA 7 4 Automatic System Answer Button 111 0 0 00 eee 7 4 Automatic System Answer Delay 110 000 c eee eee 7 5 Automatic System Answer Lines 204 0 000 cee eens 7 6 Automatic System Answer Mode 121 0 00 eens 7 7 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 o o ooooooo 7 8 Direct Extension Dial Features 0 00000 eee 7 9 a CONSIDGIALIONS i can caer AAA 7 10 Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 0000 eee 7 10 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 0 000 ee 7 11 a Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 0 00000 0c e
92. interference regulations of Industry Canada Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le Industrie Canada Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunica tions services The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equip ment rests with you an Avaya Inc system administrator your telecommunica tions peers and your managers Avaya Inc does not warrant that this product or any of its networked equipment is either immune from or will prevent either unauthorized or malicious intrusions Avaya Inc will not be responsible for any charges losses or damages that result from such intrusions For important infor mation regarding your system and toll fraud see the PARTNER Customer Sup port Document Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical sup porter assistance call the Avaya Inc helpline at 1 800 628 2888
93. is installed IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a single line touch tone telephone beyond 3 000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property Electromagnetic Interference EMl filters block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices Caller ID devices allow you to store and process Caller ID information Although the system provides Caller ID on system display phones you can connect other devices if you subscribe to the service from your local telephone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line not to an extension jack Tip Ring Device Requirements A tip ring device must meet the following conditions It must be nonproprietary that is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system Its Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a telephone Each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom NOTE You can connect a tip ring two line device to the system but it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Combination Extensions When you connect a tip ring device such as a single line telephone or an answering machine and another piece of equipment either another tip ring device or a sys
94. later systems you can access individual outside lines as in Key mode However you also can create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When you access a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Since multiple lines are associated with the pool you do not know which line within the pool is being used to make the call System mode is determined by the configuration of the processor module The system is factory set for Key mode Changing to Hybrid mode requires a system programming change modifying the processor module The mode for your system must be decided upon before installation In Key mode no outside lines can be pooled and in Hybrid mode lines can be pooled and individual lines can be assigned directly to line buttons Key Mode When the system operates in Key mode individual outside lines are assigned to users extensions for making and receiving calls At extensions with system telephones each individual line Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 etc assigned to the extension is represented by its own line button You can press any of the available line buttons on a system telephone to make outside calls Single line telephone users must dial 9 at intercom dial tone to make an outside call since their telephones do not have line buttons With Key mode you can easily join calls since each line button can be labeled with a unique line number For example if you want to join a call on Li
95. local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the telephone is set to select intercom first as recommended is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press 9 Using the Switchhook Some of the instructions in this guide direct you to rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing the switchhook for 1 2 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash However do not press the switchhook too quickly If you press the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a little longer NOTE If your feature telephone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features Use the Recall feature instead Single Line Telephone Limitations Each tip ring device requires one touch tone receiver to be available in order to dial a call intercom or outside or to activate a feature by using a code Each PARTNER ACS processor module has two touch tone receivers each 206 module has one touch tone rece
96. m If you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 7 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m If you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned Y m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 Using the Outgoing Call Restriction Button To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting 1 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction Button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its lights show the correct setting as follows No Restriction The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady Local Only The green lig
97. mailbox Button Programming You must program an operator s console with buttons that help with the handling of calls Figure 7 1 on page 7 3 shows a PARTNER 34D telephone with the following buttons Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 28 The operator can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension Idle no lights on Busy red on Calling the operator green flash Sending coverage calls to or manually signaling the operator green flutter Ringing back after the operator transferred a call green flutter Manual Signaling A Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target extension hears a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by an operator to alert the boss Programming an Operator s Extension 7 2 Operator Features to an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally you can use a Manual Signaling button to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system telephones NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programme
98. manually 1 Press feature OQ 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding manually 1 Press feature QM 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button Ifan originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Forwarding by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button Ifan originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Using Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HONDO Dial your extension number Dial the
99. mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the automatic backup on this card NOTES gt If the date of the file AUTO mmddyy or MAN mmddyy indicates that this is not the file you intended to use see the instructions packaged with the PC Upgrade card for how to install the Backup Restore PC Card m If the Backup Restore PC Card is fresh from the factory and no backups have been recorded on it yet the filenames are MAN and AUTO respectively You cannot use these files for a restore they generate the error message Empty File after you press in Step 4 4 Press to start the restore If the system detects an error before beginning the restore the bottom line of the display shows one of the following messages See Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for more information about these messages Insert Card or Insert Valid Card Bad File or Bad File Try Again Incompat Version or Incompatible Versions Empty File If the system does not detect an error the restore begins One of the following occurs When the restore has completed successfully the bottom line of the display shows Restore Complete for two seconds Then the system resets itself which means that all calls in progress are disconnected You are no longer in System Programming mode If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restore Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls in progress are disconnected and all of the syste
100. more than one coverage call rings at your extension you can press the Caller ID Inspect button Then press line pool or button next to the flashing green light to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent Answering a Call on a Single Line Telephone If your single line telephone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook m To answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call m To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active Placing Calls on Hold You can place and retrieve calls on hold by using either the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone You can make and receive other calls on another line or pool while a call is on hold Considerations For system telephones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the h
101. must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List and Marked System Speed Dial numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Using System Password To use System Password 1 Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at a PARTNER or MLS telephone press Hola Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display telephones Press an outside line button or press and a two digit line number or a pool button or press and a three digit access code and lift the handset Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the telephone Touch Tone Enable F08 Use this feature to send touch tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line For example you may need to dial touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by telephone service You can use Touch Tone Enable only from a system telephone Considerations Touch Tone Enable is needed only when dialing on a rotary line Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected For example use this feature after dialing a bank by telephone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system telephone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch You cannot use Touch Tone Enable with Call Screening F25 To activate this feature from with
102. needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change system settings as needed You can perform System Programming from extension 10 or extension 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time you should use extension 11 for programming By doing so you can program without disrupting call handling at extension 10 m Telephone Programming allows telephones to be customized to meet individual users needs There are two types of Telephone Programming depending from where you program Centralized Telephone Programming programming individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 Extension Programming programming an individual system telephone from the extension to which it is connected You need a system display telephone for System and Centralized Telephone Programming If you have any 34 button telephones in the system you must use a 34 button display telephone to program since an 18 button telephone cannot be used to program a 34 button telephone Also if your system has both PARTNER and MLS telephones you should use a PARTNER display telephone at the programming extension NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is
103. of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads ASA 1 Record If a message was recorded previously a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play 6 Press A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone 7 After three seconds you hear a confirmation tone Begin recording your message Automatic System Answer Features 7 8 Operator Features Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 20 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this current procedure m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the following procedure m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset To play back an Automatic System Answer message 1 Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press the button Dial 100 A display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 A display similar to the following appears Message Playback After the message is playe
104. of the module see Figure 2 18 Connecting Lines and Extensions 2 16 15 16 7 U 7 Figure 2 18 Connecting Line Cords to Line Jacks 10 Connect the free end of each line cord to the appropriate network interface jack see Figure 2 19 Test the lines by plugging a system telephone into extension jack 10 Press the line button for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Test the extensions by doing the following a Plug asystem telephone into the first extension jack on each module b Press the line button on the telephone for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Connect modular telephone cords to the extension jacks starting at the top extension jack on the processor module see Figure 2 20 When that module is full move to the leftmost module Fill each module before moving on to the next module to the right Route each cord through the wire manager on the front of the module see Figure 2 20 Connect the free end of each modular telephone cord to the modular wall jacks for system extensions Gather the line and extension cords hanging below the wire managers of the first two modules and twist tie or wire wrap them Repeat for the remaining cords For the 5 slot carrier place each bundle of wires in the indentations cut out of the bottom edge of the carrier Installation Figure 2 19 Connecting the Line Cord to
105. office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local telephone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations m You should change the factory setting only under two conditions If using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops calls shorten the time Programming To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QO O at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 18 450 msec 2 Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing Next Data or Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press until a display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 30 750 msec You also can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall timer to 750 msec press O Recall Timer settings run from 01 to 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec is the factory setting 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Recall Timer Duration 107 4 46 4 Programming System Options If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m If acall is disconnected shorten the time m If the Recall signal has no e
106. on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The recipients response is not heard by the third party Users cannot receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at their extension They are part of a joined call Joining Calls They are part of a Conference Call They are recording a call by using Record a Call F24 They are screening a call by using Call Screening F25 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 58 Programming System Options Programming To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OQQA at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 59 PARTNER Advanced Communications nonr metalation AO ana ES Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 60 Initial Telephone Programming 5 Contents OVEMIEW a anaa E at AG oat dR cet ee gal wee ade eae Ae 5 1 Required Telephone Programming 0000 e eee eee ee 5 2 Automatic Line Selection ais A oe ea ee eh ee se eee ee 5 2 a Considerations s es hath ee tet eee dae a ad ea o oa SAU des a 5 3 a Programming s
107. or access a held or transferred call on the line You cannot use Direct Line Pickup to access an active call at an extension that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or to access a held call at an extension that used Exclusive Hold Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information unless Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is used to prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button _ Press Feature OQO Press a programmable button Press left Intercom 6 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Direct Line Pickup Features 8 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a System Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a system telephone 1 As desired lift the handset 2 Doone of the following m Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line and dial the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join m Press intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Using Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a Single Line Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone
108. out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for the extension Other Telephone Problems 11 10 Troubleshooting m f someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Station Lock was used to lock the extension What to do Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If the extension was not locked go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Local telephone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isolate the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different telephones using the same line m f you cannot make calls from one telephone on all lines follow the procedure for System Telephone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 m If you cannot make calls by using different telephones go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Too many tip ring devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is on a system telephone go to Possible Cause 7 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try to call later m If you can make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding 206 1 receiver 400 2 receivers or 308EC 6 receivers modules to avoid future problems Call the helpline n
109. press Feature 0 3 to use Recall On a single line telephone first press and release the switchhook to get intercom dial tone Then send a Recall signal by pressing HOO On a single line feature telephone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone Then send a system Recall signal by pressing AOG m You can program a Recall button on a system telephone to send a Recall signal with one touch Recall cannot be used with Call Screening F25 m f users have trouble with Recall use Recall Timer Duration to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local telephone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Recall FO3 8 48 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m You can press to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number Programming To program a Recall button 1 Pp oO N Press Feature D 0 Press a programmable button Press Feature D 3 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Recall on a System Telephone To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line 1 2 3 Press the programmed button or Feature D 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original c
110. program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return m If you transfer a call Caller ID information if it is available is passed to the destination extension m If you have a voice messaging system you can use Voice Mailbox Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscribers voice mailbox m Anextension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer either of two active calls m You cannot use Transfer with Record a Call F24 Call Screening F25 and Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Transferring a Call on a System Telephone Follow these instructions to transfer a call by using a system telephone m To transfer a call to another extension 1 While active on the call press Transfr The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line or pool button winks 2 Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call and then hang up 4 If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension Lift the handset to reconnect to the caller
111. receive Caller ID information for the duration of the call When an extension is idle you receive Caller ID information for a call coming in to your extension This feature requires no special programming however you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Considerations The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack on a processor module 206EC module 308EC module or 400EC module To receive Caller ID information wait until the second ring before answering the call Individuals with Call Waiting from the local telephone company do not receive Caller ID information for the second call Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local telephone company When Caller ID information is not captured the system date and day default appears instead For the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version the dialed digits will display slightly differently than shown in the illustrations in this document The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display on system telephones for the duration of the call An out of area message appears if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Prove appears if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information If you use SMDR telephone numbers of in
112. setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this telephone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 15 m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the telephone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Telephone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem telephone Then plug the cord into a telephone that you know rings properly m If the replacement telephone rings properly the problem telephone is defective Call the helpline to arrange for a replacement m If the replacement telephone does not ring properly call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Telephone Problems 11 4 Troubleshooting System Telephone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 The telephone cord is plugged into the wrong jack on the bottom of system telephone What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack m Ifthe telephone works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Telephone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the telephone With the handset hung up plug the cord in again m If the telephone works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the tel
113. system extension number G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a system line number 2 Available only on system phones 3 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later 4 PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later A 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 3 Intercom Dial Code Features Intercom Dial Code 16XX 166G I68LL 170 170 17G r7G 177G 177G I8LL 1891 1892 Feature Call Pickup Group Pickup Direct Line Pickup Active Line Loudspeaker Paging Simultaneous Paging Group Calling Ring Group Calling Page Group Hunting Ring Group Hunting Voice Signal Direct Line Pickup tdle Line Automatic System Answer Record Playback Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1 These features can be used by the telephone user and the System Administrator F represents the Feature button I represents the button XX represents a system extension number G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a system line number 2 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later A 4 Table A 4 Basic Calling and Answering Features Cross Reference of Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Answering calls And seeing who is calling you from Display Display 6 13 another extension telephones And seeing who is calling you from Display Display 6 13 outside telephones Caller ID 4 9 And transferr
114. system settings if your system settings become corrupted if you make changes and decide you would rather use the former settings or if you replace your processor module and want to retain the system settings you had on the previous processor module A successful restore takes about five seconds NOTE When a restore completes successfully the Restore Complete message appears for two seconds at idle extensions 10 and 11 Then a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs disconnecting any calls in progress You should warn users before beginning a restore or do the restore during nonbusiness hours Considerations m If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restore Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the factory settings Using Restore To initiate a restore 1 If you have a Backup Restore PC Card installed skip to Step 2 If you do not have a PC Card installed see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AHQ G at extension 10 or 11 The top line of the display shows Sys Set Restore or System Settings Restore Backup and Restore 4 6 Programming System Options 3 Choose the backup file you want to use for the restore 1 MAN mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the manual backup on this card 2 AUTO
115. telephones supported by the PARTNER ACS fall into two categories m System telephones telephones specifically designed to work with the PARTNER ACS m Single line telephones touch tone or rotary telephones System Telephones System telephones include the following m PARTNER telephones PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 m MLS telephones m MLC 6 m TransTalk 9000 series wireless telephones Only the PARTNER telephones are discussed in this guide see Chapter 6 Using the Telephones For information about an MLS MLC or TransTalk 9000 series telephone refer to the documentation that came with the telephone Intercom Autodialers PARTNER telephones support the PARTNER CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11 The autodialer provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system The status lights next to each button also indicate calling activity at that extension You can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling or manual signaling Each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system telephone or on the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow you to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch System Components 1 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Single Line Telephones You can also use indus
116. the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary lines and you are having trouble calling out on tip ring touch tone telephones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Considerations m Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems ma Use this feature only if the Dial Mode 201 for at least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Ring on Transfer 119 4 48 Programming System Options Programming To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 4seconds m 2 8 seconds the factory setting Y m 3 12 seconds 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Star Code Dial Delay 410 Central offices of some telephone companies support the use of star codes before the dialed telephone number to obtain special services For example in some areas you can dial amp to prevent Caller ID information from being sent to the called party Rotary telephones use 11 in place of the Star Code Dial Delay is designed to help prevent misdialing when star codes are used For information about the star codes that your central office supports contact your local telephone company If Star Code Dial Delay i
117. the Wake Up Service Button turns off To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension _ 2 3 4 5 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number Press the Wake Up Service Button to exit Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call 1 2 3 4 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension Wake Up Service Button 115 7 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications nonr metalation AO ana ES Wake Up Service Button 115 7 22 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 8 Contents OVEMIEW s e A E AS 8 1 Extension Programming i 2 s 0a0ideieii eierecet eee iaeda bagi deiabiaedd as 8 1 s Dial Gode Features suegra rea 8 2 Account Code Entry FIZ la oie ee ek eee at aS 8 2 a Considerations a a es peti fae we ae dee Saw a eae ek Cave ees 8 2 els ll ta ave ie ie salts O ee wa ee wee 8 3 a Using Account Code Entry usemos bide sewn a eee pees 8 3 PUIG DIAM 2 015 sones ee a acaba scans uted brad o ie de ea bass 8 4 Considerations ste Sata eee es aed kote hots ai Gates 8 5 a PFOGFAIMMING 2 vou eas ae e ee aa we A ae Ea RE ea aaa 8 5 a Us
118. the extension has received a message Programming To program a Message Light On or Off button 1 2 3 Press o0 Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 9 for a Message Light On button or Feature N 0 for a Message Light Off button Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 5 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light On F09XX and Message Light Off F10XX 8 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Message Light Off on a System Telephone To turn on or off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press eature Q Q for On or Feature for Off If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on off Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the telephone whose message light you want to turn on off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Using Message Light Off on a Single Line Telephone To turn on or off the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press for On or AO for Off 3 Dial the extension number of the telephone whose message light you want to turn on off Paging Features You can page your colleagues over the lou
119. the group m To avoid missing calls when Do Not Disturb is not needed turn it off Do Not Disturb F01 8 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m f Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled m Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active ring at that extension if they transfer return m Extensions with Do Not Disturb activated do not receive Caller ID information unless the call is answered m Users with Automatic VMS Cover Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m Users with Call Coverage turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to the covering extension m You cannot use Call Screening F25 when Do Not Disturb is turned on Programming To program a Do Not Disturb button _ P oO N Press OO Press a programmable button with lights Press eature Q Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Do Not Disturb From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Exclusive Hold F02 Use this feature to prevent other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system telephone Considerations m Thi
120. time With single line telephones you can do only three way conferencing You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use Conference Drop F06 to remove the last added outside party from a conference call Caller ID information does not display for extensions that are active on a conference call Using Conference on a System Telephone Follow these steps to originate a conference call on a system telephone 1 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call Press Conf The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party If you are adding an inside party to a call you must wait until the party answers If you are active on a call using a pool button and you want to set up a conference call by using one of the other lines in that pool you can press and dial the pool s access code to gain access to another line in that pool Press again to add the second party to the call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties Using Conference on a Single Line Telephone Follow these steps to originate a conferen
121. to 32 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously Table 1 1 Release 1 0 and 1 1 Capacities Configuration Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand alone 3 lines 8 extensions 8 extensions 3 lines PARTNER ACS processor module PARTNER ACS processor module 2 slot carrier 7 lines 8 extensions 14 extensions 5 lines Processor module 400 module Processor module 206 module 5 slot carrier 15 lines 20 extensions 32 extensions 11 lines Processor module two 206 Processor module four 206 modules modules two 400 modules m PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later systems allow up to 19 lines and up to 40 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously Table 1 2 Release 2 0 or Later Capacities Configuration Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand alone 3 lines 8 extensions 8 extensions 3 lines PARTNER ACS processor module PARTNER ACS processor module 2 slot carrier 7 lines 8 extensions 16 extensions 6 lines Processor module 400 module Processor module 308EC module 5 slot carrier 19 lines 8 extensions 40 extensions 15 lines Processor module four 400 modules Processor module four 308EC modules NOTE If you want to install a PARTNER Mail VS module keep in mind that it uses one of the slots in the carrier which reduces the system line and extension capacity System Capacity 1 6 Overview System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and
122. to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone System Speed Dial numbers can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press HANQA A Marked System Speed Dial number can also begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press PHAPA Programming To change the Star Code Dial Delay setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 1 at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed Press the number on the dialpad for the setting you want or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting appears m 0O 0 Seconds Delay the factory setting Y m 1 1 Second Delay Star Code Dial Delay 410 4 50 Programming System Options m 2 2 Seconds Delay m 3 3 Seconds Delay m 4 4 Seconds Delay m 5 5 Seconds Delay m 6 Not Active To return to the default setting press Remove Select another pro
123. use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning 4 This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required 5 DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location 6 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table 7 Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 8 DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak A CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots or openings they prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided DO NOT place the product flat on a surface The control unit must be wall mounted SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Master Table of Contents 1 Overview Welcome leisan nasama ada A AA A 1 1 SiructiresoT th BOOK os ura id RR e 1 2 FOME A O a EN ES 1 3 Modes of Operation cas anaranjada 1 4 System CAPA tt A AS dt 1 6 System COMPONEINS es sei par ia daras e gedameads 1 7 2 Installation OVER a A LA A OE ROS A da dat 2 1 Evaluating the ENVIO MENE cres er arras Rese oe Y 2 2 Installing the Control Unit iy 25 3 oss bd RR aa 2 4 Connecting Li
124. wea hae eee Hold Disconnect Time 203 000 cece eee a Considerations su ose Sea ate 5 oy A a Age ate RR were es Byte a ences a Programming as 4 aa nea adres Caw ha ot da SE eta Reed bem eo eae Hotline 603 sc cede ede sa a Oe ey OE ake E Oe a Adee a CONSIDEFAIONS drea de bakes Aare Onde Cae E Rae adi a Programming teta ou SG sie wee Ray AS Sees Hee OEE e Intercom Dial Tone 809 0 0 0 eee eee Programming ar dai tl deena eee ee ews Line Access Mode 313 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee eee a Considerations ere pnei EA ee AAA a Programming eri cr EE E E o Line Coverage Extension 208 0c cece eee eee eens s CONSIAGTStIONS ura sn tar Sn A es tA eee WE Oe a tae Pa ee a Oe a Programming renal ewes Be kee E eae Outside Conference Denial 109 oooooooococoooc eee a COMSIGBT SCIONS uri ra Soe acd ab tao ae at ace ae dh ain eae a Programming bos dl ok a thee a dao ae Pe a at Coe Pool Programming las A AAA Mode of Operation 198 oii tied ow pi dt a ewes a Pool Access Restriction 315 0 0 0c ees Pool Extension Assignment 314 0 0000 cee ee eee Pool Line Assignment 207 0000 eee Recall Timer Duration 107 0 00 eee eee Contents CONSI ION Sr A we ee RG eee Sa a eee 4 46 a PROGIAMIMING essesi oc a Pela is Kae ai a ei 4 46 Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later 1 0 teens 4 47 Considera OS a a a a AN Mi
125. 0 80D 80 sce E E Ext Message Intercom Intercom Figure D 2 Programming from an MLS 34D Telephone Overview D 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications el Installation edil ane Use Overview D 4 Numerics 2 slot carrier wall mounting 2 5 5 slot carrier 2 8 wall mounting 2 8 A AA Automated Attendant Extensions 9 8 Abbreviated Ringing 4 2 Abbreviated Ringing 305 4 2 Account Code Entry 8 2 using 8 3 account codes 4 27 Forced Account Code Entry 4 28 list of entries 4 29 alarms clearing a Backup Failure alarm 11 3 alerts 9 1 Allowed List Assignments 4 18 Allowed List Assignments 408 8 4 Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 16 assigning to an extension 4 18 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 4 16 Amplified Handset 9 2 Answering a Call at your extension 6 19 identifying a call type by ringing pattern 6 7 6 10 ringing at another extension 8 15 8 39 answering a call on a single line telephone 6 21 answering a call on a system telephone 6 20 answering calls A 5 answering machine personal 9 6 retrieving messages 9 5 9 6 system 9 4 Answering Machines 9 4 9 7 assigning lines 3 10 Attendants Automated 9 7 Auto Answer Intercom see Hands Free Answer on Intercom Auto Attendant 9 7 Auto Attendant Extensions 4 2 Auto Dial Buttons description 7 2 programming 8 4 8 5 using 6 12 8 6 Auto Dial Numbers 8 5 Auto Dialing 8 4 using 8 6 Autodialers Intercom 8 5 descri
126. 0 eee 3 7 s CONSIGCFATIONS ex arenosas ste ete a rs de eae ar ede les 3 7 a System Date 101 52 vpn A e eee 3 8 a System Day 102 Release 2 0 and Earlier 0 0000 e eee eee 3 8 a System Time 108 sc 8 oes os ad AO AOS a ho 3 9 a Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 Release 3 0 or Later 3 9 ASSIGNING LINCS ira SAID a aa ia 3 10 a Number of Lines 104 oociorc rit ca aa br tay ieee ee 3 10 a Key EXIENSIONS ocd pra p aiaa as es as gee 3 11 a Pooled Extensions Release 2 0 Or later oooooocooooocor om 3 12 CUSTOMIZING EXTENSIONS sais a ai a 3 12 COPY Settings 399 us reads e a dsc ea e pies 3 13 a Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 0 00 eee 3 14 Emergency Phone Number List 406 000 eee 3 15 a Considerations s G snaa AG A nal eee BI Ree ed ee Sus aoe 3 15 a Programming i dea aw a te AU a OR an Rs r AS go 3 15 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use Initial System Programming Overview After you install the system hardware you must program basic system settings assign lines and customize extensions To do this you must understand the basics of programming System Programming Basics After the control unit is installed you set up the system by using a combination of the following two types of programming Use the System Planning Guide when programming System Programming allows you to customize the system to meet the
127. 0000s eae 11 25 Multiple Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights 11 25 Poor Transmission Quality on Modem 0000 cee eee eee 11 26 Other Problems with SysteM oooococccooocc eee 11 26 11 ii PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use 11 iv Troubleshooting Overview From time to time problems may arise with various system functions This chapter describes some common problems and recommends solutions for them You also can obtain help with solving problems by contacting your authorized dealer or by calling the helpline Customer Self Service Center on the Internet If you can access the Internet you can use the Customer Self Service Center to get on line information m Answers to frequently asked questions 800 number directory If you have a service agreement active lease or warranty you can get additional on line information m Feature programming tips m Notification of changes to products m Product documentation m Chat service The Internet address for the Customer Self Service Center is on the inside front cover of this guide When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter If not you can call for help If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your local Authorized Dealer or call the helpline Consultation charges
128. 1 to assign all the lines that you want the auto attendant to cover to extension X 2 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring Auto Attendant 9 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use oa a fF Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Use AA Extensions 607 to identify extension X as the auto attendant Set Transfer Return Extension 306 for extension X to extension 10 Set the auto attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the operator does not pick up a call the auto attendant does AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 This feature lets you identify extensions where auto attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display telephones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant This procedure applies only to auto attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system Considerations On system display telephones Automated Attendant appears when a call is being transferred from an auto attendant Transfer from AA or Transfer from Auto Att appears when a call transferred by an auto attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension m For each auto attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the des
129. 1 Q 72 2 20 ESS2 R 73 3 30 Fao S 74 4 40 G 41 T 81 5 50 H 42 U 82 6 60 43 V 83 7 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X 92 9 90 e253 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 Considerations m You can program a name through Centralized Telephone Programming for any extension regardless of the telephone type on that extension If a user wants to program his or her own extension name he or she must have a system display telephone at that extension m Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports m Program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection Then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display Extension Name Display 5 4 Initial Telephone Programming a Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means that the extension name displays exactly as it is programmed Programming To assign a name to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press left intercom For extension 12 the display reads 12 Enter Extension Name If aname was assigned
130. 10 or 11 m To Start System Programming Press O 0 Press System Program System Program To End System Programming Press O 0 m To Use a Specific Procedure Dial and a three digit procedure code Example O for System Date To Cycle through System Programming Procedures Press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure m To Cycle Through Available Settings Press Next Data or Prev Data To Return to Factory Setting Press Icon Description wy Factory setting Button with lights required a Button with lights recommended PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later 3 0 PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later System Flow Chart System System Date Dial Dial the date MMDDY Outside Conference Denial Dial OJO Dial 1 Allowed Y 2 Disallowed OS Eo carier Dial Automatic System Answer Delay Dial 1 Sun U Dial 2 Mon 3 Tue 4 Wed 5 Thur 6 Fri Dial a ring delay 0 9 T Sat 2 rings Y System Time Dial O Mode of Operation Dial the time HHMM 24 hr military time Number of Lines Dial Dial two digits 01 19 for of outside lines assigned to every extension 3 per ACS processor amp 308 module 2 per 206 or 200 module Y 4 per 400 module y WARNING Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup In Key mode the Number of Iines procedure will change Line Assignment
131. 2 a Adding New Lines i iy doe eo eee REY SER Ee OAS ile 10 13 a Adding New PoOols c2a05 heen iebadd oh dam Aitee dota eee eee ee aa a A 10 14 a Adding New Extensions o ooooccococoo eee 10 14 s SWAPDING EMENSIONS 322 gos aeteene A oa vee OG eee ee Sees S 10 14 10 i PARTN HE 10 ii s Sys ar a tem In Rar eee bas stallat ion Programming and CAPA e A a ee se Upgrading the System Overview You can upgrade your system software to a new release of the PARTNER ACS by using a PCMCIA card You also can add or replace modules and add lines pools and extensions Battery Replacement The processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When battery power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display telephones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should notify the System Administrator when they see this message You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the message NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshold Z caution Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing t
132. 2 Play Press A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a tone Begin recording your message Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 40 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the playback procedure that follows m To exit the procedure hang up the handset To play back a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press the button Dial 6 Q A display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 The following display appears Message Playback Direct Extension Dial Features 7 14 Operator Features After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play 6 Doone of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the pro
133. 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 In Hybrid mode the Number of Lines procedure will change Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program H O O 8 Enter the system password Dial 1 Key factory setting w 2 Hybrid Automatic System Answer Button Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select Button then press a programmable button Direct Extension Dial Delay Dial Dial a ring delay 0 9 2 rings Y 0 rings answered immediately Direct Extension Dial Button Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select Button then press a programmable button Transfer Return Rings Dial Dial 1 digit 0 9 for of rings before call returns 0 9 rings 4 rings Y 0 rings no return Outgoing Call Restriction Button Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select Button then press a programmable button Recall Timer Durations Dial
134. 5 Transfer Return Extension 4 55 Transfer Return Extension 306 4 55 Transfer Return Programming 4 55 Transfer Return Rings 4 56 Transfer Return Rings 105 4 56 Transfer Ringing 6 7 6 10 6 26 Transfer One touch 6 27 Transfer One touch see Auto Dial Numbers Transferring a Call to another extension 6 25 IN 12 to fax machine 9 15 troubleshooting backup problems automatic 11 17 manual 11 19 combination extensions 11 15 other telephone problems 11 10 single line telephones 11 8 system problems 11 23 all calls disconnected 11 24 ASA DXD missing card message 11 23 calls on ASA lines disconnected 11 23 calls on hold disconnected 11 23 dead telephones 11 25 modem transmission quality poor 11 26 no disconnect after held call hangs up 11 24 other 11 26 System Restore 11 21 system telephones 11 4 tip ring devices 11 16 U Unique Line Ringing 4 57 Unique Line Ringing 209 4 57 upgrading adding new extensions 10 14 adding new lines 10 13 adding new modules 10 4 adding new pools 10 14 changing system settings 10 12 changing the system clock 10 13 replacing modules 10 6 5 slot carrier configuration 10 9 stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 10 6 swapping extensions 10 14 Vv VMS see Voice Messaging Systems 9 39 VMS Cover 8 62 light patterns 6 7 using 8 63 VMS Cover Rings 3 12 9 41 VMS Cover Rings 117 9 41 VMS Hunt Delay 9 42 VMS Hunt Schedule 9 43
135. 7 ii Master TOC Master Table of Contents Initial Telephone Programming OVSIVICW a ee ad tag ip aed Gee el Cline ar seth Bae Tid ok aed ao e als 5 1 Required Telephone Programming 0000 0c eee eee eee eee 5 2 Automatic Line Selection 0 0 tee 5 2 Extension Name DiSplay 2o 4 e0s 4 ae ea eee Sea PER ee ee ae Pe eee eS 5 4 Line RINGING ns dape Saw ye FA ea Wee HGCA SE SRY e pt 5 5 Using the Telephones OVEIVIEW lt a tee yap be o sen pee Seedpeer eee pales 6 1 System TSlEDNONES att ua e a pay eee a RA 6 1 Single Line TelephonesS o o oooccccoccr tees 6 10 DISPIAY ssi ben eee ice ede tee a onda eee ke eee pe tee ee we oe 6 13 Handling Calls 0 44 54 08 o Raves Se va Re eee toe Sak BRS GA Me Sakae eds 6 15 Operator Features OVGIVIOW ai Seine ei eo ne hee Rae eee ee he eae ee we eae Weed 7 1 Programming an Operator s Extension 0 00 c cece eee eens 7 1 Automatic System Answer Features 0 000 c cece eee eee 7 3 Direct Extension Dial Features 0 0000 ee 7 9 Night Service Button 503 boston Ed A obs alles bP SAR OS 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee 7 17 Station Unlock F22 cet ead wiles mene one Ae eek huts hee a Kee Se 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 115 0 0 eens 7 20 Programming amp Using Telephone Features OVER ga alan we Ea Ree 8 1 Extension Programming 22 5 sveedscaee deed 6 eee a bt Aaa own eee 8 1 Account Cod
136. 8 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line A user at the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for the specified line Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 Release 3 0 or later to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension or VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 Release 3 0 or later to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the owner s voice mailbox Customizing Extensions 3 12 Initial System Programming Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 to select the lines to associate with extensions for logging unanswered calls Users can view the Caller ID information for unanswered calls on the telephone s display panel and autodial the numbers of the unanswered calls a Display Language 303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display telephone Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension Also use this feature for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it m Forced Account Code features Forced Account Code Entry 307 to prevent the extension from making an outside call until a required account code is entered Forced Account Code List 409 to create a
137. AGE Jack description 8 44 PAGE jack 9 24 Paging 8 44 loudspeaker 8 44 PARTNER model phone 8 34 8 37 simultaneous 8 35 paging A 6 loudspeaker 8 44 simultaneous 8 46 parking calls 8 14 PARTNER ACS Processor 1 7 PARTNER ACS Processor Module 1 9 PARTNER MAIL VS programming 9 40 PARTNER Remote Access PC Card 3 1 PARTNER telephone wall mounting 2 21 PARTNER telephones 6 5 assembling 2 18 system telephones 1 11 PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card 1 10 8 5 10 13 PARTNER 34D Telephone buttons and indicators 6 2 programming overlay 3 2 PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer 1 11 connecting 2 24 password dialing restriction override 4 51 Password Remote Administration 4 47 Password System 403 4 51 8 60 PC Card using 10 2 PC Card slot 1 10 PC Card Slots 1 10 PC Cards 1 11 4 4 PCMCIA 1 10 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Card see PC Cards Personal Speed Dial 8 55 using single line telephone 8 56 system telephone 8 56 Picking up a Held Call 6 22 8 40 Pickup call 8 15 group 4 35 8 15 Pickup Group Extensions 4 35 IN 8 Pickup Group Extensions 501 4 35 Placing a Call 6 15 plastic protector 2 9 plastic protectors 2 6 pool access code 1 5 Pool Access Restriction 4 42 pool buttons 1 5 4 43 Pool Extension Assignment 4 43 Pool Extension Assignment 314 4 43 Pool Line Assignment 4 45 Pool Programming 4 41 Pooled Extensions assigning lines 4 43
138. ARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use What to do Exit the procedure and retry the manual backup after a few minutes Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system Restart the Backup Programming Manual 124 procedure Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try the backup again using the backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 m If the backup completes successfully the problem is solved m If the backup fails again try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support document to order a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause Changes
139. AVAYA communication PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 518 456 803 Comcode 108848292 Issue 1 October 2000 Copyright 2000 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Document Number 518 456 803 Comcode 108848292 Issue 1 Date October 2000 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful inter ference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This system is Class B compliant in some configurations See the PARTNER Customer Support Document for additional FCC information Industry Canada IC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emis sions set out in the radio
140. Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 8 iv Syst m Password wae hoses pee A bau a eye Seer Sew Pee 8 60 COMSIdSIQUONS oo aunt oe sida eve rs dana 8 60 a Using System Password cd alain od Uae eae eae ete a AS ee Rabies abt Steve 8 61 Touch Tone Enable F08 00 20 e ees 8 61 a Considerations yt tote ak oe kl ae ida BOA ye Oe pa a bd 8 61 a PrOGraMMING os cessa wide ran toe ieee ee bad oe edi dee 8 62 a Using Touch Tone Enable sapos sana a 8 62 VMS Cover A tad a tal Mads a a a dl e da meo A 8 62 a CONSIdOratiONS nia ba wd ee ant lA EMO aN CAA AES Gee 8 62 a ProgrammMNO A A EAS Vee wide ened Ae 8 63 a Using VMS COVE usina a ie e a ea ewe 8 63 Voice Interrupt Features o oooooooccoooc ees 8 63 a Voice Interrupt On Busy ss pucoviperio eee eee ai TER ee EE we 8 64 a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 0 000 cece eee eee 8 65 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 0 0 0 ccc ees 8 66 Considerations ra Oat woe eS ee Ree hea whe asa eee 8 66 i Programming oie a iss SR aha ee one wae eA eae e 8 66 a Using Voice Mailbox Transfer 0 0 ee 8 67 Programming amp Using Telephone Features SE IR Bees EAT Overview You can program many of the system s features right from your telephone When you program a feature from your telephone you are using Extension Programming The features discussed in this chapter are features often programmed by individual users
141. D information is displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Release 2 0 or Later Use this feature to program extensions to log answered Caller ID calls so that calls answered at an individual extension can be viewed in the Caller ID Call Log Once the feature is activated for an extension when a user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered NOTE Caller ID Log Answered Calls is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones Caller ID Log Answered Calls helps to track callers telephone numbers For example a sales representative who takes telephone orders could find a number in the log for a caller whose credit card information was later determined to be invalid Caller ID Programming 4 10 Programming System Options Considerations m Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log Answered Calls is set to active Programming To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQQ at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to
142. Do Not Disturb on the top leftmost button of an MLS 18D telephone refer to Figure D 1 find the top leftmost button on the MLS 18D telephone and press the button labeled M on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay Overview D 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use PARTNER 34D Overlay Overview D 2 LJ f Feature PA PA Y L_66 HH Eu Ou FF Next Next Next Y Procedi 1 lt Dati LUR 7 lr rocas we lr ma lr aa r enoe 55 resi iem ba Len D Ba CRY OY Ge G M N o P AA Z G H l J K L A B Cc D E F System Central J S S Program Tel Program amp Message MLS 6 Phone oodda o mi o AJ 208 SCC ED Intercom Intercom z Ext oO Volume v A O Spkr MLS 18D 12D 12 Phone N D O 0 oO o M o N o Q o P D O oO El o l o J o K o L O mi o B E a F o G a H oO O 0 O oO A O B oO C O D E Intercom Intercom a O O Volume Speakerphone Y A O Spk of Mic HFAI MLS 34D Phone Oo a a a a o qLU_ oY LW gX LEE LFF O O O O O oO EQ CR 15 51 11 ec DD a a a a a Do 20M SENO SLO SCP SAA GBB a a
143. Enter a four digit code by using digits 0 9 You hear intercom dial tone again 4 Re enter the four digit code m If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3 you hear silence The extension is locked m If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3 you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked Repeat the locking procedure To unlock a single line touch tone telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press MQM You hear intercom dial tone again 3 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension m If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension you hear silence and the extension is unlocked m If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the extension you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked Repeat the unlocking procedure System Password The System Administrator programs a four digit password that you can enter from PARTNER and MLS telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Considerations m The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction and Pool Access Restriction System Password 8 60 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group
144. From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off When the light is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox Voice Interrupt Features Use the Voice Interrupt On Busy feature to talk to a user who is active on a call The user then can use Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back to speak to you Voice Interrupt Features 8 63 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Voice Interrupt On Busy A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call When Voice Interrupt On Busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably can hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the operator to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call
145. Group Pickup button Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button Press left intercom 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 _ ao fF oO DN Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Pickup on a System Telephone To use the Group Pickup programmed button press the button To use Group Pickup manually 1 Lift the handset and press niercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Using Group Pickup on a Single Line Telephone To use Group Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Group Pickup I66G 8 40 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Hotline The System Administrator programs internal hotline extensions and their alert extensions When you lift the handset of a hotline telephone the alert extension rings Considerations m The hotline telephone can receive transferred calls but do not pick up the handset at that extension until the telephone rings Using a Hotline Telephone To use the hotline telephone 1 Lift the handset of the hotline telephone The designated alert extension rings 2 When the call is answered speak into the handset Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Use this feature to program a button on your PARTNER or MLS telephone to si
146. However they can be programmed by the System Administrator as well from a system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Some of the features only show the instructions for using the feature because the feature usually is programmed by the System Administrator Extension Programming Extension Programming is the programming that you perform at your own telephone not at the telephone at extension 10 or 11 To program at an extension use the following procedure 1 To start programming dial Feature D 0 The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings You can program the remaining buttons with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 2 To assign a name to the extension press left and enter the character codes See Extension Name Display on page 8 33 for the codes Program features as described in this chapter To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Mic AFAD To exit programming mode do one of the following m Press Feature D 0 m Lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Overview 8 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Code Features You can access some features by dialing a feature code at the telephone dialpad From a system telephone you can dial or intercom followed by the two or three digit code or pres
147. In these situations be aware that the button that you press at extension 10 or 11 the programming extension is likely to be in a different location than the button on the telephone to which the programming applies the target telephone If you are programming from a PARTNER 18D or MLS 18D telephone the button locations are the same You can use the illustrations in this appendix to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other Figure D 1 shows the buttons on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS telephone Figure D 2 shows the buttons on the MLS 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER telephone The letters on the PARTNER 34D Overlay in Figure D 1 are printed on the Overlay To help you program from an MLS 34D telephone you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS 34D Overlay in Figure D 2 on your overlay If you want to program features on specific buttons at target telephones you should 1 Look at the figure with the overlay that matches the telephone at your programming extension Find the location of the button in the picture of the target telephone Note the letter associated with that particular button Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay a fF oO DN Press that button on the programming extension For example if you are using a PARTNER 34D telephone at extension 10 and you want to program
148. L Figure 9 8 Single Fax Machine The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line To Program To program a single fax machine 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X m If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Selection to select line A last on all other extensions or remove line A from all other extensions if they should not use it to make outgoing calls 3 Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Fax Machines 9 17
149. Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Adding New Pools You can create new pools if your system is operating in Hybrid mode If you add outside lines for use in a new pool you may need to use the following features Dial Mode 201 if the new lines are rotary lines Pool Line Assignment 207 to assign lines to the new pool Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the new pool to specific extensions m Line Ringing to specify when the new pool starts ringing at each extension that has the pool Pool Access Restriction 315 to limit an extension s access to all the lines in the new pool m Automatic Line Selection to add the new pool to the extension s Automatic Line Selection sequence Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can probably use Copy Settings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If you wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions on page 3 12 Swapping Extensions If a user changes location but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit Chan
150. Options Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Programming To change the Display Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OOG at extension 10 or 11 The current Display Language displays 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 To change the Display Language press until the appropriate value appears m 1 English the factory setting w m 2 Spanish m 3 French 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Distinctive Ring 308 Use this feature to determine whether calls should ring at a tip ring device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls to the tip ring device should ring like outside calls Considerations m Change the setting to Not Active if a tip ring device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls m If distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension with both a system telephone and a tip ring device the system telephone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing patterns but all calls ring at the tip ring device using a single ring burst m The sy
151. PC Cards to use in these slots for the following purposes m Use a Backup and Restore PC Card to backup or restore telephone and system programming m Use a PC Upgrade card After powering down the system you insert the PC Upgrade Card and turn the power back on While the system upgrades the bicolor red green power LED on the processor flashes for about 20 seconds then the power LED becomes steady green All of your system and extension programming is saved and ready to work with the new release m Use a PC Card to store Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial ASA DXD messages You can insert the card in either PC Card Slot of the processor module Release 2 0 or later m For PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 or later use a PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card to provide messaging features store personal greeting and store and retrieve callers messages for up to four mailboxes System Components 1 10 Overview m The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions You also can use the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 You must have additional PARTNER Remote PC Software to program the system remotely You can use this PC Card to program the system locally with a PC For information on installing PC Cards see the instructions that came with the card Telephones The
152. Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 2 0 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line for which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time The current hold disconnect time for the line number you specified is displayed For example if line 1 is set to the factory setting 09 450 msec appears on the display 3 Press until the appropriate value appears 00 No Detection 01 50 msec 02 100 msec 03 150 msec 04 200 msec 05 250 msec 06 300 msec 07 350 msec 08 400 msec 09 450 msec the factory setting Y 10 500 msec 11 550 msec 12 600 msec To program the next line press then repeat Step 3 Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system Select another procedure or exit programming mode Hold Disconnect Time 203 4 36 Programming System Options Hotline 603 Use this feature to identify an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline telephone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions Use a single line telephone as the hotline telephone since this feature makes use only of the telephone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of telephone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline telephone can be used to make announcemen
153. R Telephones Using System Programming 3 4 Initial System Programming Programming Mode When you are ready to program a system or telephone feature you must enter programming mode Follow these steps to enter programming mode 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 To enter programming mode press Feature 0 0 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 appears instead of 10 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 Press again A display similar to the following appears SYSTEM PROGRAM Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways m Direct Method Dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by a and a three digit code for example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes m Cycle Method Cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press and to cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes To exit prog
154. Seconds in System Programming Mode Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected Possible Cause You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do Nothing This is normal behavior after a restore the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours Problems with System Restore 11 22 Troubleshooting System Problems Call Rings Continuously When Answered No One at Other End Possible Cause Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is used on a system that does not support far end disconnect What to do Call your local telephone company and find out whether they support far end disconnect If the local telephone company does not support far end disconnect you should not set the Automatic System Answer Mode 121 to either Hold or Ring and you should not use Direct Extension Dial If the local telephone company supports far end disconnect but the problem still occurs call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Calls on Hold Are Disconnected Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a longer interval m If calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the longest interval call the helpline number listed on the front
155. Sen Aes ane Aap es nd SO we Se Ses Se 4 2 Automatic Extension Privacy 804 0 0000 cece eee 4 2 CONSENSO a GE load 4 3 a PLOGFAMMING is pis pee ed Ge A eee Ree aes eee hee ee 4 3 Backup and Restore 4 3 a Considerations aa ae a cei s Re ae Pe apm le ede eek amp 4 4 Backup Programming Automatic 123 0 000 002 ee 4 4 Backup Programming Manual 124 0 0 00 00 cee tee 4 5 a Restore Programming 125 0000 eee 4 6 Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 nasaan anaana aea 4 7 me Considerations a Sena ttt et Bie a a aos 4 8 a PIOGFAMMING cerrar ta grea io ea 4 8 Caller ID Programming sita daras MAA AA ok 4 8 Gallet ID re naaa a rra adn e aca 4 9 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Release 2 0 or Later 2 2 oo 4 10 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Release 2 0 or Later 4 11 Caller ID Log All Calls 319 Release 2 0 or Later o o oooooooo 4 12 a CalerlD Type i222 i456 id ia Ei RAs eRe tae eee 4 13 Call Waiting 316 6 i 0acccad eet ew hese big ieee eben tee eek esa ae es 4 14 a Considerations seta rar maras Bates a awe ee Ea 4 14 a PLOGFAMMING pp DEA re bf 4 14 Copy Settings IDO 2 rai ra ds es di de ed 4 15 a CONSIASTatONS urraca ea a a RA a 4 15 a PODIA is taria ii 4 16 Dialing Restrictions and PermissiONS o oooocooooccocor eee ee 4 16 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 0 00 000 cee eee 4 16 Allowed List Assig
156. Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Personal speed dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing a single button Considerations If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system You cannot program Personal Speed Dial numbers onto Auto Dial buttons You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a single line telephone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 A combined total of 800 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature External Hotline 311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external hotline telephone number A Personal Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting Personal Speed Dial cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Speed Dialing Features 8 55 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 2 5 Press o0 Select a two digit code by pressing and d
157. Time 103 m If the display is correct the problem is solved m If the display is still not correct see System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 5 Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause System battery power is low What to do Replace the system batteries see Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 12 Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number Possible Cause 1 Not receiving Caller ID service from local telephone company What to do Contact your local telephone company to check on Caller ID service m If you are not receiving Caller ID service subscribe to it m If you are receiving Caller ID service go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Line connected to a module that does not support Caller ID What to do Make sure lines with Caller ID service are connected to a processor 206EC 308EC or 400EC module If Caller ID lines are not connected to one of these modules install the appropriate modules and or make the appropriate connections Possible Cause 3 Someone activated Call Coverage What to do Check the system telephone display m If Coverage Call for XX where XX is the extension that activated the Call Coverage appears the call is a coverage call Call Coverage displays the extension number of the person who activated the feature rather than Caller ID information m If Coverage Call for XX does not displa
158. Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect 0 0000 c ee eee ees Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call 0 0 00 cee eee eee Problems with Combination Extensions 00000 e eee eee eee Telephone Does Not Work Properly 0000 e eee ee Problems with Tip Ring Devices 0 00 eee Tip Ring Device Does Not Answer 0 00 c eee eee Tip Ring Device Does Not Dial Out Properly 000 c eee eee Call Records Wrap on SMDR Printout 0 0 00 c eee eee eee eee Problems with Automatic Backup 00000 0c eee eee eee Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 0 ee ee Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 1 6 0 eee Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 0 eee Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 2 2 2 eee Problems with Manual Backup 0000 eee eee eee eeee Display Shows Insert Valid Cara in System Programming Mode 0 0c tee Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode 00 cece teens Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode oooccooccccccc tees Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee Display Shows Bac
159. a Ho ADAM Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature you use while on a call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when Examples B 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use you are already on a call You can store a Recall signal by pressing ekr but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing Hold to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone CER 40d Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter DOOQMOMO UctAODMOO Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter DQG QQ HG Gran All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones On Off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press vic HFA to include a stop between the two codes For instance if the code to activate
160. a Centrex feature is 0 and the code to deactivate the feature is HON store QOO Wic HFAN DAOC on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing which may not be required for your dialing area QEN 0A000000 AOOO Examples B 2 Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial numbers see System Speed Dial on page 4 53 System Speed Dial on page 8 57 and Personal Speed Dial on page 8 55 We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future To dial m On a system telephone press Code m Onasingle line telephone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone Speed Dial Form C 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications Syst
161. a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 You must have additional PARTNER Remote PC Software to program the system remotely Overview 3 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a module to which the outside line is connected The extension number represents the extension jack on a module to which the system telephone or tip ring device is connected NOTE If you are installing a voice messaging system with the PARTNER ACS you must assign the voicemail ports to Hunt Group 7 to avoid having the voicemail ports answering all calls immediately See To Program a VMS on page 9 40 Using System Programming System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines pools or extensions You can also use System Programming to set up dialing restrictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there Programming Overlays To do System Programming you place a Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Figure 3 1 shows the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D telep
162. account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Account Code Entry F12 8 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 6 Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press to indicate the end of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 To enter or change a forced account code 1 From a system telephone if a password is programmed for the system enter it before lifting the handset Lift the handset or press Spek 3 Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on 4 Enter an account code supplied by your System Manager by doing one of the following m Dial the account code manually by using the telephone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code 5 Press an idle line or pool button m Ifa Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 m Ifa Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to the outside line Verify the account code with your System Manager then repe
163. ad Selb dees ean d Werke 8 48 Recall F03 a ieee the ae ceca te ate a ie Sa tt og ait he a eed oS ell ate Bed fee at 8 48 a Considerations hs 2 a e eM Ye ht CEOS ae hte ee ets Ce UN ae MEN io Ad A Mee oe 8 48 a PFOGFAMMING varea Os woxx ae tetedcdet Pkwe 652 wa aa E ET A eee EA 8 49 Using Recall on a System TelephoNe o ooooccocccc eee 8 49 Using Recall on a Single Line Telephone 000 c eee 8 49 Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later 00 cece eee 8 50 Considerations ccnp ree Geet aii Eine cee an Moe a eee etude ata 8 50 a PROGFAMIMING are an 435 ga oh ee Satie es BOS OO Wad Lee ee ee ete 8 51 a Using Record a Gall sac cca taa bwesteee ee AA es 8 51 Redialing Features 20 id hs eee eee iw AA Oe ee ESS 8 51 Last Number Redial F05 0000 00 kaS RT EEO ES EA a eee 8 51 Save Number Redial F04 0 0 00 ccc eee eee eee 8 53 Send AC AUIS oe chee aye ae ore eee A Rah he Mee alae Gites cod te ae ae 8 54 a Using Send All Calls nnana e lb loa le PM aA ath ot Do e 8 54 Speed Dialing Features oooocococccro 8 55 a Personal Speed Dil iniciar da Las 8 55 a System Speed Dial circa tame a nd a ri a eek 8 57 Station Lock F21 oi E AAA A AA a 8 58 a Considerations secar ra AR dd 8 58 e A O 8 59 a Using Station Lock on a System Telephone 0000 ce eee eee eee 8 59 a Using Station Lock on a Single Line Telephone 0000 cee eeeee 8 60 8 iii PARTNER
164. age F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later 8 10 3 Programming amp Using Telephone Features If no covering extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Using Call Coverage at a Single Line Telephone To send your calls for coverage 1 4 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial your extension number Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press BOO Dial your extension number twice Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Use this feature to forward all intercom transferred and outside calls from your extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number You can activate this feature from your extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me Considerations You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls coverage calls or transfer return calls Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system The telephone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarded unless Do Not Disturb is active Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contai
165. ah eae ae a ee ae ak wy owl e guia eee 2 1 Evaluating the Environment 0200 c eee ee eee 2 2 Installing the Control Unit iii ie we eRe See ES wha ww eee 2 4 a Wall Mounting the Control Unit 2 0 0 0 00 ee 2 4 a Labeling Jacks 4 25 b4 aeaicon cee e td isn 2 11 a Grounding the System o ooococcccooc 2 12 a Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module 0 eee eee eee 2 12 a nittalizing the System s n Maia eee ete eee ede eee ee Wed aeiaeaes 2 14 a Checking the LEDS i a0 0ca0 og deeds dae i gedaan tase aba dee ds Sere 2 15 Connecting Lines and Extensions ooocccoocc ee 2 16 Installingthe COVER xr riera apes PR a od 2 18 Installing TelephoneS 0 000 e eee eee ee 2 18 Assembling PARTNER Telephones 000 c eee eee eee 2 18 a Connecting and Testing Telephones 00 c eee eee eee 2 23 Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer o oo o 2 24 Connecting Auxiliary Equipment o oocccooccccoo 2 25 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use Installation Overview This chapter explains how to install the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS Releases 1 0 1 1 2 0 3 0 or later The information applies to all releases unless otherwise specified The installation of the PARTNER ACS involves the following Evaluating the environmental requirements Installing the control unit Connecting lines and e
166. al PARTNER Remote PC Software to program the system remotely Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected and an automatic backup was attempted What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 11 1 You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Problems with Automatic Backup 11 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use We ti Slide the switch on the PC card up to the nonprotected position VAES Figure 11 1 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore PC Card Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert t
167. all press the programmed button or Feature 0 3 again Using Recall on a Single Line Telephone To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature telephone that has one You hear intercom dial tone Press HO Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature telephone again Recall FO3 8 49 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later Use this feature to record an active conversation in the PMVS mailbox Record a Call applies only to systems that have PMVS Release 5 0 or later equipped with four ports and an MLS or PARTNER system telephone This feature is not available on tip ring telephones A WARNING If silence is detected on the line for 15 seconds call recording will terminate Before you can set up Record a Call for an extension you must m Install PMVS Go into PMVS programming and program Record a Call for that extension To install PMVS refer to the PARTNER MAIL VS Installation and Programming Guide Considerations m A Record a Call button with LEDs must be programmed on a telephone A maximum of two conversations can be recorded at one time When two conversations are being rec
168. allation Follow these steps to wall mount a PARTNER telephone 1 Reverse the plastic hook that sits in the earpiece part of the handset cradle see Figure 2 26 Turn the telephone upside down If you have a tray on the bottom of your telephone remove the tray that holds the User Instruction cards by pressing the tabs on both sides of the tray near the pull out tab while sliding the tray straight out Holding the stand with the wide edge down mount the stand on the wallplate by using the keyholes on the base of the stand see Figure 2 27 Figure 2 26 Reversing the Plastic Hook Figure 2 27 Mounting the Stand on the Wallplate Installing Telephones 2 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 Plug one end of the telephone cord into the jack in the center of the wall plate see Figure 2 28 5 Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the LINE jack on the bottom of the telephone see Figure 2 28 6 Wrap any excess cord around the cord wrap posts on the bottom inside of the stand NOTE With certain telephones you can wall mount the telephone and use the slide tray and tray card Do one of the following m If you have an 18 18D 34D or Intercom Autodialer telephone
169. aller ID Inspect see Caller ID Inspect F17 on page 8 19 Ifyou are not active on a call you can press line buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines However keep in mind that if you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the display Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on Conference Calls m If you receive a call routed to your extension by Direct Extension Dial a voice messaging system or automated attendant the Caller ID information is passed to your extension when you answer the call m If you transfer a call the Caller ID information is passed to the destination extension m If you send calls for Call Coverage the Caller ID information is not passed to the covering extension Coverage Call for XX appears instead so the user at the covering extension can identify the person for whom the call was originally intended Caller ID information is displayed if you Join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Direct Line Pickup Active Line Call Pickup or Group Pickup For incoming calls Caller ID information appears only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do not receive Caller ID information However Caller I
170. alling the Control Unit 2 6 7 Attach the 2 slot carrier to the top right side of the two modules see Figure 2 5 properly engaging the connectors on the modules to the carrier 8 Fasten the carrier to the modules by using the two 4 screws included with the carrier see Figure 2 6 Installation Figure 2 5 Attaching the 2 Slot Carrier Figure 2 6 Fastening the 2 Slot Carrier Installing the Control Unit 2 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 9 Insert the 3 1 2 inch 8 screw into the bottom of the modules see Figure 2 7 Tighten it until the mounting tracks of the PARTNER ACS o processor module are flush against the wall Do not overtighten or the module will warp Then go to the next procedure Labeling Jacks on page 2 11 Figure 2 7 Tightening the Bottom Screw Wall Mounting a 5 Slot Carrier and Modules Install the 5 slot carrier within 5 feet 1 5 meters of a properly grounded wall outlet not controlled by a switch and the network interface jacks When you mount the carrier on the wall leave at least 1 foot 0 3 meter of clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom to ensure proper ventilation NOTE The location of each module within the car
171. ame line which eliminates the need for a dedicated fax line When the start button on a fax machine is pressed the fax machine sets up to send a fax The sending fax machine sends a special tone called a calling tone or CNG tone This tone is sent until the call is answered If another fax machine answers the appropriate signals are sent back to the calling fax machine to send the fax transmission When an incoming call is answered by PARTNER Voice Mail PARTNER Mail VS PARTNER MAIL or ASA DXD the system determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to fax machine s it automatically transfers the call to Hunt Group 8 Considerations m To use Fax CNG Detection you must have a voice messaging system or ASA DXD You must also have your system configured in one of these ways Partner ACS as a stand alone module 308EC R3 0 module in slot 1 any modules in remaining slots 200 206 400 module in slot 1 308EC module prior to R3 0 in any other slot NOTE Fax CNG Detection is not supported if you have a 308EC module prior to R3 0 in slot 1 m When lines appear on a fax extension make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this Set the fax machine for delayed pickup Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to either delayed ring or no ring Use Line Assi
172. amming from 3 1 programming overlays using with 3 2 Extension Name Display 5 4 8 33 Extension Programming 3 1 8 1 Extension Transfer Return 306 4 55 extensions adding new extensions 10 14 assigning Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 assigning to a Hunt Group 4 31 assigning to a Pickup Group 4 35 assigning to Night Service Group 4 34 copying settings 4 15 customizing 3 12 dialtone 4 38 External Hotline 4 26 identifying as owner of an outside line 4 40 identifying as Auto Attendant 9 8 identifying as fax machines 9 23 identifying as key extensions 4 39 identifying for doorphone connection 9 14 identifying to activate Contact Closure 9 10 identifying to receive doorphone signal 9 13 internal hotline 4 37 line ringing 5 5 locking 8 58 name display 5 4 placing into a Calling Group 4 30 receiving Voice Interrupt On Busy calls 4 57 restricting access to pool 4 42 returning Transfer calls 4 55 swapping extensions 10 14 Transfer returning to a different extension 4 55 External Hotline 4 26 using 8 34 External Hotline 311 4 26 F FACE Forced Account Code Entry 4 28 Fax CNG Detection 9 22 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 9 22 fax line saver 9 18 Fax Machine Extensions 9 23 Fax Machine Extensions 601 9 23 Fax Machines end and receive 9 16 line saver 9 16 programming for 8 5 9 23 single 9 16 fax machines 9 14 9 24 CNG detection 9 22 fax line saver 9 18 Fax Management but
173. and or making outside calls on a specific line For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager s line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the manager s line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations For pooled extensions use Pool Access Restriction 315 to assign restrictions to all the lines assigned to a specific pool Pool Access Restriction overrides Line Access Restriction For individual lines on pooled extensions use Line Access Restriction m To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so the line cannot be accessed by Direct Line Pickup m If an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only the extension cannot place calls on that line neither by pressing the line button nor by using Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line m If an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions neither by pressing the line button nor by using D
174. ange the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ OG at extension 10 or 11 Enter a setting 0 9 4 is the factory setting or press until a display with the desired amount of rings appears similar to the following Transfer Return 5 Rings Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Programming 4 56 Programming System Options Unique Line Ringing 209 Use this feature to assign a ringing pattern maximum of eight to a line for users to differentiate by sound which line is ringing Once a ring pattern is assigned to a line incoming calls on that line ring with the assigned ring pattern Incoming calls that are transferred to another station ring with the assigned ring pattern followed by two transfer beeps Transfer returned calls also ring with the two transfer beeps NOTE Unique Line Ringing is supported only in systems of Release 3 0 or later Considerations mu This feature applies only to MLS PARTNER and TransTalk telephones m You can program single line telephones for any ring pattern but they ring with Pattern 1 only m You must program MLC 6 telephones with Pattern 1 If they are programmed with another pattern they do not ring m Since only one audible alert can be heard at a station at one time the ringing pattern present at that exte
175. ant to program an outside number on a feature telephone s Auto Dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone The feature telephone s last number button may not work for an outside call To redial the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing AMG Display PARTNER display telephones have a 2 line 24 character per line adjustable display area for calling and programming feedback Specifically the display shows Current date excluding year day and time when the telephone is idle m Account code as it is entered m Number dialed when making a call m Duration of call call timer m Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call m Number and name if programmed of the extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension m Automated Attendant Voice Messaging System Or Direct Extension Dial when a call is transferred from an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Extension Dial feature respectively Transfer from Auto Att Transfer from VMS or Transfer from Direct Extension Dial if a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Dial Extension feature respectively
176. ars or press to return to the factory setting m 1 USA the factory setting Y m 2 Singapore 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programming 4 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Call Waiting 316 Use this feature to activate Call Waiting When you are on a call and a second intercom transferred or outside call comes in you hear two beeps to indicate you have a second call waiting to be answered Press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call press the switchhook again Considerations This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature m The Call Waiting tone two beeps is not repeated m Use Call Waiting only for single line telephone extensions Do not assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone interrupts the data connection m You cannot transfer either party connected by Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active m Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature m For instructions on usi
177. as hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Use this feature to transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when you know that a co worker is away from his or her desk You must have a voice messaging system to use Voice Mailbox Transfer and you can use it only from a system telephone Considerations You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system telephone to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button and then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number m While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer is Active If it is Not Active and Music On Hold is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears Music On Hold while the call is being transferred to the voice mailbox If Music on Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence m Voice Mailbox Transfer cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button _ Pp oO N Press eature D 0 Press a programmable button Press Ee
178. at this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call a Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press eature b Enter a different account code c Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature ND If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear a denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code Auto Dialing Use this feature to dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button the user can dial signal or transfer calls to the extension by pressing the button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line or pool assigned on a system telephone Auto Dialing 8 4 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Considerations m You can program an Auto Dial button only on a system telephone m Ifyou program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension m You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system telephones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system m You can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system telephone or on the Autodialer for another extension in the system You can p
179. ated lines Once the features are activated for an extension when the user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all Caller ID calls that are answered or unanswered by any extension on the associated lines are logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered NOTE Caller ID Log All Calls is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 series or tip ring telephones The Caller ID Log All Calls feature is useful when a user needs information for all calls received in the system For example a supervisor could use the log for quality assurance by contacting callers and inquiring about the customer s satisfaction with the results of the call Considerations m To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display telephone This feature is not supported on a button without lights m Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log All Calls is set to active Caller ID Programming 4 12 Programming System Options Programming To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 3 1 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to
180. ature DU Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 8 66 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Voice Mailbox Transfer To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system telephone press the programmed button or press Feature DU 2 Dial the two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 8 67 PARTNER Advanced Communications nonr metalation AO ana ES Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 8 68 Using Auxiliary Equipment 9 Contents OVW ascot oe eo Stee Salen DE 9 1 Tip Ring Device Requirements 0000 cece eee eee eens 9 2 Combination Extensions pie ele Ra 9 2 a Using a Direct Connection 22 5 25 208 at A eed et 9 3 Using a Bridging Adapter ccoo ra a hie ev dees Sheree dwn 9 3 Ifa Device Has Trouble 0 000 eee 9 4 Answering Machines 28s to aaa na 9 4 a System Answering Machine o ooccccccocco eee 9 4 Personal Answering Machine 0000 ees 9 6 Auto Attendant ici aida OS dee eh dS A ak aed adie 9 7 To Use an Auto Attendant 0000 eee 9 7 a TO Program rc A ae eran nee ba Ge eb eee A seaweed 9 7 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607
181. ave Number Redial is available only on system telephones Considerations m Save Number Redial redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes m You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system telephone to access the feature with one touch Press the button to save the number and press the button later to redial the number m You can program Save Number Redial on more than one button to save more than one number m Unlike Last Number Redial F05 Save Number Redial lets you make other calls before redialing the saved number System Speed Dial numbers cannot be saved by using this feature m A Save Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting m When you automatically dial the number displayed in the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature you can save the number by using Save Number Redial m If Save Number Redial is programmed on a button it interrupts Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Save Number Redial button _ Pd oO N Press 00 Press a programmable button Press OW Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Redialing Features 8 53 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Save Number Redial To save a number from a system telephone press the programmed button or Feature O a
182. ay want to set SMDR E Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system m When you change this feature to Active the next call record that prints includes talk time as the last field on the call report To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Programming To include the Talk field on call reports 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AH OQ Press until the appropriate value appears m Active m 2 Not Active the factory setting Y Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Messaging Systems The following voice messaging systems are compatible with your system The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System PMVS resides in the control unit in a 2 or 4 port configuration PARTNER Voice Messaging PVM PC Card 2 port configuration only The PARTNER MAIL System 2 4 or 6 port configuration is an auxiliary device that connects to the system through extension jacks Voice Messaging Systems 9 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To Program a VMS To program a PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System 1 DO PA Use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign all outside lines to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group to provide Automated Attendant Service on these line
183. be programmed 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Type 122 Set this feature for Singapore or USA operation In the USA Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming replacing the system date and time display on system telephones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information In Singapore Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming When there is no incoming number the system detects a P or an O in the reason for DN Directory Number absence field and substitutes the information sent by the local telephone company central office in the Name parameter field m If the name is supplied the system displays it m Ifthe name is not supplied either Priv or is displayed Considerations m The Caller ID Type you set applies to the entire system m A change to the Caller ID Type setting takes effect when the next Caller ID call comes into the system Programming To change the Caller ID Type setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQA at extension 10 or 11 The system shows the current setting 2 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value appe
184. ber m Fax machine line saver Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number m Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax traffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the telephone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and hang up If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically Use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify fax extensions If you have multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hunt Group any group 1 6 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup shown in Figure 9 8 is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other telephones when all other lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X Fax Machines 9 16 Using Auxiliary Equipment Line A CONTRO
185. bly also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Handling Calls 6 20 Using the Telephones To answer a coverage call 1 If your telephone is a covering extension and it rings check your display to see if the ringing call is a coverage call Also if you have an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the green light next to the button flutters while the coverage call is ringing at your extension and it is the next ringing call you answer if you lift the handset Lift the handset You are connected to the coverage call The first coverage call to ring at your extension is identified in the display If
186. breviated 4 2 Ringing Idle Line Preference see Automatic Line Selection Rings Transfer Return 105 4 56 Rings VMS Cover 117 9 41 Rotary lines 4 24 8 61 phones 1 12 rotary dialing length of timeout 4 48 Rotary Dialing Timeout 4 48 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 4 48 rotary lines sending touch tone signals 8 61 safety requirements 2 3 Save Number Redial 8 53 using 8 54 Self Service Center on the Internet Customer 11 1 Send All Calls 8 54 using 8 54 setting the date day and time 3 7 Settings changing to support PBX or Centrex services 3 14 settings changing 10 12 changing the system clock 10 13 IN 9 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use copying 4 15 Signaling Manual 8 41 Simultaneous Paging 8 46 using single line telephone 8 47 system telephone 8 46 single line telephone problems 11 8 Single Line Telephones 6 10 Single line telephones switchhook 6 11 single line telephones 1 12 limitations 6 11 problems Message Waiting Light 11 9 Message Waiting light 11 9 no ring 11 8 ringback after intercom call 11 9 SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 38 SMDR Output Format 9 38 SMDR Output Format 610 description 9 38 SMDR Record Type 9 36 SMDR Record Type 608 9 36 SMDR Talk Time 9 38 SMDR Top of Page 9 37 SMDR Top of Page 609 9 37 SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording 9 32 Speaker on standard phone 6 12 on system teleph
187. buttons 4 43 pooled extensions 4 42 definition 1 5 setup 3 12 pools 1 5 adding new lines 10 14 adding new pools 10 14 assigning lines 4 45 assigning pool buttons 4 43 Power Failure 6 10 11 2 Privacy 8 47 light patterns 6 7 using 8 48 privacy Do Not Disturb 8 31 privacy features Automatic Extension Privacy 4 2 Privacy Automatic Extension 304 4 2 Problems Solving 11 1 Processor Module description 1 9 processor module batteries 2 12 mounting tracks 2 6 Programmable Buttons 6 2 7 1 Programming 3 10 D 1 buttons 7 1 centralized telephone 3 6 extensions 3 1 3 6 3 12 lines 10 13 methods 3 5 mode 3 5 overlays 3 2 3 6 overview 3 1 PBX Centrex support for 3 14 system 3 1 telephone 3 1 voice messaging system 7 2 programming button locations on the telephone 3 4 Centralized Telephone 3 1 changing programming type 3 6 dial codes A 3 entering programming mode 3 5 Extension Programming 8 1 intercom dial codes A 4 PARTNER telephone to MLS telephone D 1 password 4 47 remote programming 3 6 retaining settings 4 52 special buttons 3 2 telephone 3 1 programming MLS telephone to PARTNER tele phone D 1 programming mode 3 5 programming overlays 3 2 R Recall 8 48 PBX and Centrex services with 3 14 programming feature on a button 8 49 programming function in phone number B 1 timer duration 4 46 using single line telephone 8 49 system telephone 8 49 Recall Button
188. ccur The information stored in the Save Number Redial F04 and the Last Number Redial F05 buffers is lost when a System Reset Programming Saved occurs Programming To reset the system press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 1 2 8 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in Programming Mode and the date and time appear on the display System Reset Programming Saved 728 4 52 Programming System Options System Speed Dial Program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system by using System Speed Dial After you have programmed the numbers anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 for that number You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions A System Speed Dial number can be up to 28 characters in length and can consist of the digits 0 9 amp and the special dialing characters see Appendix B Special Characters You assign the number to one of the codes 600 through 699 Considerations m For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Appendix B m You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature m A System Speed Dial
189. ce call on a single line telephone 1 2 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call Press the switchhook down once rapidly Handling Calls 6 24 Using the Telephones The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone Do one of the following m To add an outside party dial 9 or a pool access code plus the outside number If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back m Toadd an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties Transferring Calls You can transfer calls using the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other extensions Considerations When you press transi the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks A transferred call appears on the destination extension s button unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on which the call was received When a call you transferred is answered if you began the call on an individual line the re
190. ce of 2 00 a m After that backups are done at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month until you change the setting back to Not Active m Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however you can use either slot If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored m The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the AUTO mmddyy file only and a manual backup replaces the MAN mmddyy file only m Verify that the System Date 101 System Day 102 for systems prior to Release 3 0 and System Time 103 are set correctly These settings are not backed up m Calls continue to be handled normally during an automatic or manual backup Backup Programming Automatic 123 Use this feature to set up the automatic backup of all programming except the system date day and time When Backup Programming Automatic is set to Active the information is backed up at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month determined by the system date and time settings to a Backup Restore PC Card If Backup Programming Automatic is Active and an automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the system date and time on the top line of the telephone display at idle Extensions 10 and 11 The message is one of the following m
191. cedure or exit programming mode System Password 403 Use this feature to define a four digit password that users can enter from PARTNER and MLS telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Considerations m This feature is available only on PARTNER and MLS telephones m The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 m Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Programming To program a System Password 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A AOG at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Set System Password Data Bras Ree 2 Enter a four digit password or press to delete the existing password 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Password 403 4 51 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Reset Programming Saved 728 Use this feature to reset the system while retaining the currently programmed
192. cedure for recording a message m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure m To exit the procedure hang up the handset Night Service Button 503 Use this feature to program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines and pools assigned to the telephones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Considerations m You must program a Night Service Button on the system telephone at extension 10 m Program Night Service on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights m Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation m If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned m If you program a System Password 403 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers without entering the System Pa
193. ckup 8 15 using single line telephone 8 16 system telephone 8 16 Call Report 9 32 Call Reporting Devices 9 32 Call Reports 9 33 call reports A 9 specifying calls to be included 9 36 Call Restriction Outgoing 401 4 23 call rings no one at other end 11 23 Call Screening 9 44 Call Waiting 3 13 Call Waiting 316 4 14 Caller ID 4 8 8 18 associating lines with extensions 4 11 device 9 2 dialing from the display 8 25 display problems 11 7 erasing records 8 24 information viewing 4 9 8 19 inspecting Caller ID lines 4 10 modules required for 1 9 printing information 9 32 returning the call 8 25 Singapore operation 4 13 SMDR with 4 9 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 3 13 4 11 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing dialing logged call numbers 4 12 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 description 8 20 8 22 dialing logged call numbers 8 20 8 22 8 25 Caller ID Inspect 8 19 using 8 19 Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID Log All Calls 319 programming 4 13 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 4 10 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 programming 4 11 Caller ID Log viewing 8 20 Caller ID Logging and Dialing 8 20 Caller ID Name Display 8 25 description 8 25 using 8 26 Caller ID number 8 25 Caller ID Type 4 13 Caller ID Type 122 4 13 Calling extensions simultaneously 4 30 8 34 intercom inside 6 18 calling outside 6 16 outside call on a single line telephone 6 17 outside call on
194. coming calls print on call reports after the call is completed provided you have Caller ID Private and out of area numbers are reported as IN on call reports Any users who have access to Caller ID line s receive Caller ID information on their system display telephones You can restrict users from viewing Caller ID information by using the following For ringing calls you can block Caller ID from being displayed at specific extensions by restricting access to the Caller ID lines Use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict access to lines Pooled Access Restriction 315 to restrict access to all lines within a specific pool or both procedures for pooled extensions that have pools and lines For active calls you can activate Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed at your extension For held calls use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent other users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller ID information associated with the held call Caller ID Programming 4 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines Ifyou are active on a call you automatically get Caller ID information for that call However If you want to view Caller ID information for a second call without ending the active call or putting it on hold use C
195. conditions occur the J takes precedence For an incoming call IN appears unless the system is set up to receive Caller ID information In that case telephone numbers of incoming calls on lines with Caller ID service print in this field Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold or being handled If an incoming call lasts less than one second this field contains all zeroes Line Number This is the outside line used to make or receive the call including a line ina pool Station Extension This usually is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the last extension on the call appears on the report For transferred incoming calls the destination extension For transferred outgoing calls the originator extension Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For forwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call For coverage calls the extension answering the coverage call If the calling party hangs up on an Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial call before someone at an extension answers this field shows 00 Account Code This is the account code up to 16 d
196. covering extension subsequent calls go to the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings m f Call Coverage is turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All Covered calls are sent immediately to the covering extension until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system If VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If VMS Cover is already turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb Send All Calls 8 54 Programming amp Using Telephone Features To send covered calls immediately to coverage when Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on press Do Not Disturb All calls go to the covering extension If there is no answer the calls go to your voice mailbox Speed Dialing Features You can quickly dial numbers from your telephone by using one of these features Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Use this feature to store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the two digit code from 80 through 99 The Personal
197. ct Extension Dial is off Any calls being answered by the system continue to hear the recorded message and are prompted to enter a destination extension Direct Extension Dial Features 7 12 Operator Features Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Use this feature to specify the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature Considerations This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Direct Extension Dial Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call m If you use Caller ID make sure Direct Extension Dial Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program AQQ To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value appears Values range from O to 9 where O means the call is answered immediately The factory setting is 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Use this feature to record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature The maximum length of the message is 40 s
198. cters To mark it to override restrictions dial before the telephone To program another number or to change a number repeat Press Prev Procedure enter a new extension and repeat above steps Press to exit programming mode To remove a number Press to enter programming mode Press Dial the System Speed Dial number s code 600 699 Press To remove another number repeat Press 00 to exit programming mode System Flow Chart Lines Dial Mode Group Call Distribution Dial 00 Dial Dial a system line number Dial a group number 1 6 7 for VMS Dial 1 Touch Tone Y Dial a system line 2 Rotary Dial 1 Assigned Press to program another line 2 Not Assigned Y 3 VMS Line Cover only for Hunt Group 7 Hold Disconnect Time Press to program another line Dial BEEBE BBB BRR Ree eee ee eee Dial a system line a Pool Line Assignment 1 Dial 00 No Detection Dial O z 01 50 msec 02 100 msec 03 150 msec 1 Dial a system line 7 04 200 msec 05 250 msec 06 300 msec T Dial 1 No Pool z 07 350 msec 08 400 msec 09 450 msec a 2 Main Pool 880 Y r 10 500 msec 11 550 msec 12 600 msec e aes er E i Poo Press to program another line A Pool 882 z 5 Pool 883 a Automatic System Answer Lines e Press to program another line pe Dial 2 0 BHREEEHEEHEEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEEBEHEHEeEee Dial a system line Eo Coverage Extension Dial 1 Assigne
199. ctive at a directly dialed extension the call returns to extension 10 or its transfer return extension unless Call Forwarding F11 Call Coverage Rings or VMS Cover Rings is used or on Programming To assign or unassign a Direct Extension Dial Button with lights at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program WMA Do one of the following m If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 1 Assigned Ext10 If you want to unassign Direct Extension Dial press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 2 Not Assigned Y m f you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to a specific button press 3 The display reads DXD Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 Using the Direct Extension Dial Button To turn Direct Extension Dial on press the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Direct Extension Dial is on If calls are ringing when you turn Direct Extension Dial on the calls are answered immediately by the system To turn Direct Extension Dial off press the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 The green light goes off and Dire
200. d light next to the line button goes on if you began the call on a line in a pool the call no longer appears on your telephone If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups Hunt Group calls do not Transfer Return if the call is not answered and Transfer Return Rings 105 is set to 4 or more rings When you transfer a call from a display telephone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display telephones If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which the call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly by using the Centrex extension number If a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook f
201. d parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other parties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected Handling Calls 6 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You cannot transfer conference calls If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than on a two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside lines connected to the system You cannot conference calls and use Call Screening F25 at the same
202. d and green lights are both off or dial plus the two digit line number 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the telephone number To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Press the idle pool button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the telephone number To reserve a busy line or pool so your telephone beeps when the line or pool becomes free useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line or pool button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing Gon 2 When the line is free and your telephone beeps lift the handset and dial the number NOTE If more than one person reserves a line all their telephones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the telephone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled Making an Outside Call on a Single Line Telephone To make an outside call on a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 9 to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone 3 Dial the telephone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial t
203. d as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling Fax Management A button labeled Fax 30 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 30 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper LA PARTNER 34D Phone Night Svc INR SNR VMMegs VMBox Grp Page Ext 23 Ext 24 Ext 25 Ext 26 Ext 27 Ext 28 y E a Ext 17 Ext 18 Ext 19 Ext 20 Ext 21 Ext 22 Line a E Programmable E R Buttons E Ext 11 Ext 12 Ext 13 Ext 14 Ext 15 Ext 16 Any unused g Ext line button is programmable Line 7 Line 8 MS Bill Fax 30 Sales Cust Support Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Figure 7 1 PARTNER 34D Telephone as an Operator Console Also the operator can use an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the operator dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the telephone free for more features and telephone numbers Automatic System Answer Features The Automatic System Answer feature
204. d back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the procedure for recording a message m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this current procedure m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset Direct Extension Dial Features Direct Extension Dial answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized message This message prompts the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension Hunt Group or Calling Group The Direct Extension Dial features that you must program are Direct Extension Dial Lines Direct Extension Dial Button Direct Extension Dial Delay Direct Extension Dial Record Playback Direct Extension Dial Features 7 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Direct Extension Dial features are available for systems of Release 2 0 or later Considerations m The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately m Use the Direct Extension Dial Record Playback feature to record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no factory set message This message can prompt callers to dial an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number after the system answers an outside call Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Use this feature t
205. d ial l 2 Not Assigned Y Dial a system line a system extension No line owned by an extension Y Press Next item to program another line Press Remove to unassign ownership Press to program another line Direct Extension Dial Lines Dial Unique Line Ringing Dial a system line Dial OO Dial 1 Assigned Dial a system line 2 Not Assigned Y Dial 1W Press to program another line 2 8 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Extensions Line Assignment Dial 0 Dial a system extension To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line Dial a line number Dial 1 Assigned Y 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programable button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select Press to program another line for this extension To program another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension and repeat above steps Line Access Restriction Dial 0 Dial a system extension Dial a system line Dial 1 No Restriction Y 2 Outgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access line appears on button but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call To program another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure ji enter a new e
206. d with an extension to log Caller ID calls is guaranteed a minimum of 20 call records You also can automatically dial the number stored in the log The call records stored in each user s call log and available for viewing depend on the following m Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically whether or not the line and extension are associated with the Call Logging features f Caller ID Log Answered Calls is used alone all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged a f Caller ID Log Line Association is used alone all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged m f both Caller ID Log Answered Calls and Caller ID Log Line Association are used all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension and all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged ma If both Caller ID Log Line Association and Caller ID Log All Calls are used all answered Caller ID calls and all unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines are logged This combination can be assigned to a maximum of one extension per system The Caller ID information appears on three screens m The first screen shows the callers number or the reason that the number is not available m The second screen shows the caller s name or the reason that the name is not available m The third screen shows the date and time of the call In
207. devices on a single extension jack see Combination Extensions on page 9 2 Test the power and lights on a system telephone a While the telephone is idle press and hold the button for five seconds b Before releasing the button lift the handset All lights should light the ringer should sound and on system display telephones only a test pattern should appear on the display If these do not occur call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide c Replace the handset the telephone is now in normal operating mode Installation Figure 2 30 Removing the Plastic Cover Figure 2 31 Plugging in Telephone Cords Installing Telephones 2 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer You can connect a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer to a PARTNER telephone at an operator s extension The Intercom Autodialer is shipped with an adapter a D8W line cord a power cord a power unit and a button labeling sheet NOTE You can wall mount the Intercom Autodialer to work next to a wall mounted system telephone See the instructions provided with the Autodialer Follow these steps to connect an Intercom Autodialer to a PARTNER telephone 1 Plug the adapter into the wall jack see Figure 2
208. dling Calls 6 22 Using the Telephones You hear intercom dial tone The call is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the telephone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Lift the handset You are reconnected to the held call To retrieve a call that a person at another extension placed on hold 1 Lift the handset 2 At the intercom dial tone dial G and the two digit line number To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The first call is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again 3 You can continue to press the switchhook to move between the two calls Conference Calls You can set up conference calls by using the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties NOTE A single line telephone user can connect with a maximum of three parties including the conference originator Considerations Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to ad
209. dspeaker paging system or over the loudspeaker paging system and telephone speakers by using the following features respectively m Loudspeaker Paging Simultaneous Paging Loudspeaker Paging I70 Use this feature to access the Loudspeaker Paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the processor module Considerations m You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system telephone to access the loudspeaker with one touch m Ifthe Loudspeaker Paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m You can specify the Loudspeaker Paging system as a hotline alert extension so that the hotline telephone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker Paging Features 8 44 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Loudspeaker Paging button 1 AUN Press Feature OQO Press a programmable button Press left intercom 7 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Loudspeaker Paging on a System Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system 1 2 Press the programmed button or niercom 7 0 then lift the handset Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system NOTE If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instruction
210. dule Dial Release 2 0 and earlier Dial 1 Always Y 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Release 3 0 and later Dial line number Dial 1 Always Y 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Dial 0 6 2V PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Auxiliary Equipment Fax Machine Extensions SMDR Record Type Dial 00 Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 All calls Y Dial 1 Assigned 2 Outgoing calls only 2 Not Assigned Y Press Nextitem to program another extension ee SMDR Top Of Page Music On Hold Dial O Dial Dial Hee eae SMDR Output Format Dil O rat err Dial 9 Dial the hotline extension not ext 10 or the Mate epn of any 206 or 308 SMDR Talk Time Dial the alerted extension number not the Dial 0 hotline or 2 to paging system Dial 1 Active To remove the hotline and alert 2 Not Active Y Press Doorphone 1 Extension Contact Closure Group Dial Dial O Dial any extension except 10 11 or the Dial a group 1 or 2 first two extensions of any 206 or 308 Dial an extension 10 49 modules Dial 1 Assigned to group To remove the doorphone extension 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press Remove Doorphone 2 Extension Contact Closure Operation Type Dial Dial Dial any extension
211. e Entry F12 ie wares Fa ie So Shania RGN dS Goat A 8 2 Auto Dialing is e AE a 8 4 Background Music F19 0002 cece eee eee ees 8 7 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 0r Late tis iio aras ie aed ba a Pe ede EG ae ed eee 8 8 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 2 0 0 cee eee 8 11 Call Pare calidad ara ara Miata Aaa aia wih Sale Ra 8 14 Master TOC iii PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Gall Pickup 16 aa Fe nae rae aa eee Pee ha ae Dae ed hea eee 8 15 Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later 0 0 c eee eee 8 17 Caller ID Feauires cota seit ceded aerate ee Meroe Eee 8 18 Conference Drop F06 0c eee eens 8 26 Contact Closure F41 and Fa2 c oi ai anna ras Para Beside ads bade aid 8 27 Direct Line Pickup Features 00000 8 29 Do NOt Dist rb FOT ss ra rial raros a aaa 8 31 Exclusive Hold F02 00000 eee 8 32 Extension Name Display 42424 9 5 rias Sage eee ees OR eS 8 33 ExternaliHotline aci pena oa wales Seale Sate Dulas PAGE EMS daa de 8 34 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 00 ee 8 34 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal TGP GA ic et tare aise care eke Tech A i ats tn 8 37 Group Pickup IG6G sins wads arrima Rowe A oe ik oe aa eae E 8 39 PIOUING antro te et eR ad See A Pits BAe Od dal 8 41 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 2 eee 8 41 Message Light On FO9XX and Message Light Off F10XX
212. e Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do lf one of the telephones involved is a single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Single Line Telephone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The telephone is part of a combination extension which includes a system telephone that has Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system telephone has Background Music on A single line telephone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system telephone m f Background Music is on turn it off If the single line telephone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved f Background Music is not on go to Possible Cause 2 Single Line Telephone Problems 11 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 2 The single line telephone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system What to do See the list of supported single line telephones with message waiting lights in the Customer Support file on the compact disc that accompanies the system Also check with your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are others m lfthe telephone is not supported you can use it without message wai
213. e Rings 406 Emergency Phone Number List 117 VMS Cover Rings 407 Allowed Phone Number Lists 119 Ring on Transfer 408 Allowed List Assignments 121 Automatic System Answer Mode 409 Forced Account Code List 122 Caller ID Type 410 Star Code Dial Delay 123 Backup Programming Automatic 501 Pickup Group Extensions 124 Backup Programming Manual 502 Calling Group Extensions 125 Restore Programming 503 Night Service Button 126 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 504 Night Service Group Extensions 201 Dial Mode 505 Hunt Group Extensions PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 1 System Programming Procedures Continued Code Feature Code Feature 203 Hold Disconnect Time 505 Group 8 Fax CNG Detection 204 Automatic System Answer Lines 506 VMS Hunt Delay 205 Direct Extension Dial Lines 507 VMS Hunt Schedule 206 Group Call Distribution 601 Fax Machine Extensions 207 Pool Line Assignment 602 Music On Hold 208 Line Coverage Extension 603 Hotline 209 Unique Line Ringing 604 Doorphone Extension 1 301 Line Assignment 605 Doorphone Extension 2 302 Line Access Restriction 606 Doorphone Alert Extensions 303 Display Language 607 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 608 SMDR Record Type 305 Abbreviated Ringing 609 SMDR Top of Page 306 Transfer Return Extension 610 SMDR Output Format 307 Forced Account Code Entry
214. e button with lights Press Feature DM Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Caller ID Inspect To use Caller ID Inspect 1 While active on a call press the programmed button The green light flutters Caller ID Inspect is activated Press a line pool or button The Caller ID or Call Coverage information for the selected line pool or intercom is displayed Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature Caller ID Features 8 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or press any button other than a line pool or button The green light is off when the feature is deactivated Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Once the system administrator assigns the Caller ID Call Log Line Association Caller ID Log Answered Calls and or the Caller ID Log All Calls features to log Caller ID calls you use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 on Release 2 0 or later systems to view the log Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing is available on system display telephones for all telephones for which you subscribe to a Caller ID service Use this feature to view Caller ID information for central office calls NOTE You must program Caller ID Logging and Dialing onto a line button with LEDs to use the feature Up to 400 call records can be stored for the system Each line associate
215. e display Then repeat step 4 6 Program another extension or exit programming mode Fax Machine Extensions 601 Use this feature to identify the extensions to which fax machines are connected Considerations If you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine program a Fax Management button see Using the Fax Management Feature on page 9 21 m To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from extensions before assigning them as fax extensions m Ifan automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions Programming To identify a Fax Machine extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OOC at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected Fax Machines 9 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w 4 To pr
216. e oh it aa 4 47 e Programming caros thane lt a ged eh bad NG ede es thes bs 4 47 Ring on Transfer 119 2 0 ganei ana teens 4 48 CONSISTE e 4 48 a PIOGFAMMING sen oa wee a dd ei Bie Poe ee Mae a we 4 48 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 4s2eus secs ranita ria 4 48 a GONSIGGIAIONS cui teen wr ee een aaa Badd 4 48 a PIOGIAMMING str a Ra ee ad Hed aoa id A ee el rd e 4 49 Star Code Dial Delay 410 ura fancies Soni tae ees So ie Shas twas 4 49 a GONSIGSIAIONS 6x banc cic ed eae Aas Sok eae a bad hoes eee alns Sd 4 50 a Programming suelas ll dls dra Baa se esse de 4 50 System Password 403 rio otk hey iG SAM ee Beh oe tae SOM a ARAS 4 51 a Consideration Siess naa wba OG eS kde e oho wa Ree Geta eee Be Re 4 51 a ProgrammiNg ascent ee a ok oh E Dechy ae 4 51 System Reset Programming Saved 728 000 cece ee ee eee eee 4 52 a CONSIdOratiONS via ata aa austen ada tea taa a Baia Bade Brad 4 52 E Programming ds E A a de s 4 52 System speed Dial paid wae li ad CANO Shae eo eM E 4 53 a Considerations sass ree Ena Rasa oe 45 2 ees Ae ad ea las Reese Ba 4 53 a PLOGFAMIMING stan eee E LESS ERAGE DE Oe Oe eS bas 4 54 TOW Call Prefi 402 oi taste eGo oe Sy eee ees A 4 54 a Considerations E 4 54 a PROGEAIMMING es a ls A E y 4 55 Transfer Return Programming 00 0 cece eee eee eee 4 55 Transfer Return Extension 306 00000 cee eee 4 55 Transfer Return Rings 105 00000 4 56 Unique Line R
217. e selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension On either a system telephone or a single line telephone you also can use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL to access a line for making an outside call You can ring or page any of four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page 17G l 7G You can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G If Station Lock is used at an extension you cannot dial outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 If dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension the system may prevent you from placing certain calls at that extension For example you may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so you cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction 315 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Use the following features to override dialing restrictions Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and System Password 403 Users with system telephones can enter account codes to track incoming and outgoing calls For more information
218. e still out see the Customer Support Document on the accompanying compact disc for information about whom you should contact Installation re Stand Alone SSSSSSSD SISS090 booo 9999 Figure 2 16 Attaching the Power Cord Figure 2 17 Module LEDs Installing the Control Unit 2 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Connecting Lines and Extensions NOTE If extensions are not wired to any modular jacks call a qualified service technician Use the following procedure to connect lines and extensions 1 Test for a dial tone at the network interface jacks before connecting outside lines to the control unit For the test connect a tip ring telephone to the first network interface jack a Lift the handset and listen for a dial tone If there is no dial tone contact your local telephone company before continuing b Repeat for each network interface jack 2 Connect line cords to the line jacks on the modules Start at the top with the line jacks on the processor module and then move to the leftmost module Fill each module before moving to the next module to the right see Figure 2 18 3 Route each cord through the wire manager on the front
219. e target extension must place an intercom call to the person signaling m You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Station Lock and Voice Mailbox Transfer m To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button Programming To program a Manual Signaling button gt Press Eeature D 0 Press a programmable button Press Eeature O Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension Enter x before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Manual Signaling To beep the target extension press the programmed button while the handset is in the cradle The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed To ring or voice signal the target extension 1 2 3 Lift the handset or press Spek Press intercom Press the programmed button To transfer a call to the target extension 1 2 While active on the call press Tansir Press the programmed button Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 8 42 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Message Light On F09XX and Message Light Off F10XX A lit message light indicates that you have a
220. e telephones and system telephones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension To manually change an extension s VMS Cover state program the VMS Cover feature ona button with lights Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Voice Messaging Systems 9 40 Using Auxiliary Equipment Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls n immediately to their voice mailbox m f an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified amount of VMS cover rings m If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice messaging system Programming To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OCO at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system To assign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory settin
221. eaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone m To make a call without lifting the handset press to get a dial tone then dial the number you hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset m If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the speaker and microphone by pressing and hanging up the handset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset the speaker and microphone turn off m To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press wic HFa This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your telephone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your telephone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system telephone by pressing and then either dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system telephone or a single line telephone However if you try to make a
222. eature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 9 at extension 10 or 11 Select a list entry 01 99 A display similar to the following appears Forced Act Code List 03 DATA jae ene e E Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press to save the account code in memory Forced Account Codes 4 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 Do one of the following m To enter other account codes press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the account code you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the account code you just entered press Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Groups of Extensions Placing extensions into groups allows users to help each other in answering calls You can set up the following groups m Calling Groups m Hunt Groups m Night Service Group m Pickup Groups Calling Group Extensions 502 Use this feature to place extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group The first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller A typical use of this feature is to have callers ring into a Calling Group of sales representatives The system can
223. econds Considerations m You can record only one message for Direct Extension Dial m You must record the Direct Extension Dial message from the system display telephone at extension 10 m You cannot record or play a message while Direct Extension Dial or Automatic System Answer is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Direct Extension Dial Features 7 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To record a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 Press the button Dial OQA The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads DXD 1 Record If a message was previously recorded a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record
224. ecorded music or messages to callers on hold Considerations a f Music On Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence m The audio source must be connected to the control unit by using an RCA phono plug The Music On Hold input jack accepts a maximum input of 2 Volts at 50 Kohms m If the audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly turn it off by changing the Music On Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem m You can adjust the volume of Music On Hold using Music On Hold Volume 614 a If Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active and Music On Hold is Active transferred callers hear Music On Hold until the call is answered m If Music On Hold is Active users with system telephones with speakers can play Background Music through their telephones speakers a f Automatic System Answer is on callers hear Music On Hold while waiting for someone to answer the call a f Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the settings for Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer 119 m If the operator at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear Music On Hold when they answer their wake up calls Music On Hold 9 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To change the setting of the Music On Hold jack
225. ect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial telephones and even some feature telephones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine single line telephones on the same extension with system telephones or other devices without using expensive adapters or connectors Single line telephones can do many of the things that system telephones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using single line telephones Use single line telephones as power failure backups system telephones will not work If you connect single line telephones to the first two extensions on the PARTNER ACS processor module users can place and answer outside calls on the first two lines If you connect a single line telephone to the first extension on each 206 module users can place and answer outside calls on the first line of each 206 module You can connect single line telephones in combination with system telephones at power failure extensions or you can simply keep spare single line telephones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure To use a system feature press in place of used on system telephones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use on system telephones dial only the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone To use a Speed Dial number pre
226. ed by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is a PARTNER system restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the buttons on system telephones or to inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the PARTNER system cannot prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions use those instead of the PARTNER system restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program PARTNER system restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system and PARTNER system restrictions apply However PARTNER system dialing permissions do not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Customizing Extensions 3 14 Initial System Programming Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or C
227. ee 7 13 a Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 ooooooooooooo 7 13 Night Service Button 503 tercios card A AAA 7 15 s Considerations euros ata rl a Ae ed GA 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 0 2 0 0 0 0 0c ee 7 17 s Considerations e ci wantin ah awl AU dd Epa ade a lyre 7 17 y PEO MAMINO e182 Gx neta sie Ud maida ERA ee tela eet 7 17 a Using the Outgoing Call Restriction Button 00000 eee 7 18 Station Unlock F22 eri a A ee kes 7 19 Considerations sian AA ARI AAA gad Oe 7 19 a Using Station Unlock on a System Telephone 000 0 eee eee 7 19 a Using Station Unlock on a Single Line Telephone oooocoocccocccoo o 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 115 0 0 0 ccc eens 7 20 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use Operator Features Overview A typical setup of the PARTNER ACS includes using extension 10 as the system operator position The person at extension 10 thus becomes the primary operator for calls coming into the system Certain system features are used only by the system operator these are explained in this chapter Programming an Operator s Extension One of the initial programming duties in programming extensions is to set up operator extensions To set up an operator s extension you must program call handling options backup answering options and buttons used for specific operator features Call Handling Options If you set up a
228. ee 9 30 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR o oooocccocoooco eee eee eee 9 32 Voice Messaging Systems cooccococco tee 9 39 Upgrading the System OVGIVIOW vic e EA A hou AA 10 1 Battery Replacement coc coace etae aeae give AA en 10 1 USing a PCCard uscar atari a Ot eee wate 10 2 Adding New Modules occ oot ee a eG eek eee een cues 10 4 Replacing Modules 40s0e saci ge ttig rotate Ae el iSong a eee Gis 10 6 Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 12 Troubleshooting OVGIVIOW 22 oo ed An dd akan de eee eh had ae ae ba ba Ra aed dea gees 11 1 Customer Self Service Center on the Internet 11 1 When You Need Help 0 00 tte 11 1 Power Failure Operation a2 3 00cc0 ride ed ead Gees bude teed ways 11 2 Battery Replacement ic arta e aa nents aia 11 2 Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm 2 2 ee 11 3 System Telephone Problems 0200 eee ete e ee 11 4 Single Line Telephone Problems 0 0000 c cece e ee eee eee ee 11 8 Other Telephone Problems 2 000 c eee eee eee eee teen ES 11 10 Problems with Combination EXtensi0NS oooccoccccoo 11 15 Master TOC v PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Problems with Tip Ring Devices ooocccoccocoooc eee Problems with Automatic Backup 02020 eee eee eee Problems with Manual Backup 00000 cece eee eee eee Problems with Syste
229. eeded Once a VMS Cover button is programmed you must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover is assigned VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension m Use VMS Cover Rings to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system m A user can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox m Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox VMS Cover F15 8 62 Programming amp Using Telephone Features If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS cover rings If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Programming To program a VMS Cover button 1 2 3 4 Press Feature QO Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using VMS Cover
230. eld call is retrieved or the caller hangs up Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected Handling Calls 6 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Hold acts differently on feature telephones single line telephones with feature buttons When you press a button on a feature telephone the call is held at the telephone itself This means other telephones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also callers on hold at a feature telephone do not hear the system s Music On Hold You can use Exclusive Hold F02 to put calls on hold that can be retrieved only from your own extension Placing a call on Exclusive Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that call the call no longer is available to you To ensure that no on else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold
231. elephone This way you can open an electric door lock or activate other electronic devices by entering the feature code or pressing the programmed Contact Closure button Considerations m Program and or on buttons with lights so you can monitor the status of the Contact Closures The button s green light lights when the Contact Closure is activated by you and the red light lights when the Contact Closure is activated by another user in that Contact Closure Group The light turns off when the Contact Closure is deactivated Before you can activate a Contact Closure your extension must be assigned to the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure m Use Contact Closure Operation Type to specify how long the Contact Closure remains active when activated If the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle one user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure When the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle if a user activates the Contact Closure so that the toggle is On and then a power failure occurs the toggle automatically changes to Off as a security measure Contact Closure F41 and F42 8 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you plan to use a Contact Closure to control a door lock you may also want to install a doorphone at that door Use Doorphone Extensi
232. elephone number displayed the third button You also have the following options at the Call Log Dial display m Press the Back button to return to the Telephone Number or Name Display m Press the Call Log Display button to exit the Call Log The green light goes off when the feature is deactivated Caller ID Name Display F16 Use this feature to toggle the display between Caller ID number and Caller ID name Caller ID name is an optional feature of the Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be available in your area even if Caller ID number is available Caller ID Features 8 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Program this feature on a button with lights on a system display telephone When Caller ID Name Display is on the green light is on indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID number m SMDR reports print only Caller ID number where available If a number is not available it is reported as IN on the call report Caller ID Name Display has no effect on Call Coverage calls Coverage calls always display the extension number of the user who is sending calls for coverage m You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Caller ID Name Display button Press OO Press a programmable button with lights Press aug Program another bu
233. em Installation Programming and Use Answering a Call on a System Telephone You can answer a call on any line or pool that is ringing or select a specific line or pool if more than one is ringing m When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line or pool is ringing you are connected to the line or pool that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display telephone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appear on your display until you pick up the handset or press Sekr m To answer a call on a specific line pool or button 1 Press line pool or button for the line you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press Spk You are connected to the call m To answer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hola The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 To return to the first call put the second call on hold then press line pool or button for the first call m To answer a voice signaled call your telephone beeps and you hear the caller s voice Ifthe microphone is on you can speak after the beep Ifthe microphone is not on press Wic HFA or lift the handset m To respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call you hear two beeps and the originators voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking proba
234. em Installation Programming and Use Table C 1 PARTNER ACS System Speed Dial Numbers Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 600 628 601 629 602 630 603 631 604 632 605 633 606 634 607 635 608 636 609 637 610 638 611 639 612 640 613 641 614 642 615 643 616 644 617 645 618 646 619 647 620 648 621 649 622 650 623 651 624 652 625 653 626 654 627 655 656 678 657 679 658 680 659 681 660 682 661 683 662 684 663 685 664 686 Speed Dial Form C 2 Speed Dial Form Table C 1 PARTNER ACS System Speed Dial Numbers Continued Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 665 687 666 688 667 689 668 690 669 691 670 692 671 693 672 694 673 695 674 696 675 697 676 698 677 699 Table C 2 PARTNER ACS Personal Speed Dial Numbers Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 80 90 81 91 82 92 83 93 84 94 85 95 86 96 87 97 88 98 89 99 Speed Dial Form C 3 PARTNER Advanced Cotnmunigstions pa ly Installation Se ose a es Speed Dial Form C4 Programming Mixed Telephone Types Overview This appendix provides information about programming from a PARTNER 34D telephone to MLS telephones and from an MLS 34D telephone to PARTNER telephones
235. ension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to line A B C Fax Machines 9 18 Using Auxiliary Equipment m f extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to Pool D line A B C Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools on extension X to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Send and Receive Fax Machines If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives see Figure 9 10 Figure 9 10 Send and Receive Fax Machines When you send a fax an outside line is automatically selected Incoming fax calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2 If a fax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2 If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A
236. ension Y to No Ring NOTE Make sure extension X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 4 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 9 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Station Message Detail Recording SMDR The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information allows you to detect any unauthorized calls bill clients or projects bill back by department reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code print Caller ID information Call information is recorded after each call is completed For outgoing calls the system records information for each call that lasts more than 10 seconds The timing begins when you lift the handset or press to access an outside line For incoming calls the timing begins when the call is answered Timing stops when the call is disconnected The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module Consideratio
237. ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Considerations An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect If you do not create a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them The system compares the first six digits of an account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code List If the match is successful you can dial an outside number If no match occurs you cannot dial an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system telephone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter as the list entry You can enter more than the required digits for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least to get an outside line but can enter additional digits to track a specific customer or item number Programming To create a Forced Account Code List 1 2 3 4 Press F
238. entrex system dial out code 9 on most systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number Emergency Phone Number List 406 Use this feature to create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and emergency services numbers You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code 201 but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency List Considerations m Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits m Enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it including any toll prefixes m When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening m With Release 2 0 and earlier systems if an extension is programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 a user at the extension is required to enter an account code before dialing a number in the Emergency Phone Number List m With Release 3 0 or later systems users at Forced Accou
239. entries in the Forced Account Code List 409 only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report m Marked System Speed Dial numbers appear on the call report as F nnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code m If you use Caller ID SMDR reports include the telephone numbers of incoming calls Programming To identify the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears a 1 All Calls outgoing and incoming the factory setting m 2 Outgoing Only 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Top of Page 609 Use this feature to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper clearing a jam or to print a new header after changing SMDR Output Format or SMDR Talk Time When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Considerations m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly m You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print Programming To program SMDR Top of Page 1 Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program Sys
240. ephone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the telephone works the cord is faulty Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement m Ifthe telephone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 15 Possible Cause 3 m If the telephone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Possible Cause 4 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the telephone Then plug the cord into a telephone that you know works m Ifthe replacement telephone works the problem telephone is faulty Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement m If the replacement telephone does not work go to Possible Cause 4 Display Shows Only 16 Characters per Line Possible Cause A power outage occurred What to do Unplug the modular telephone cord from the telephone and plug it in again If the display is still incorrect see System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 5 System Telephone Problems 11 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display Is Incorrect Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly What to do Re enter the date day and time using System Date 101 System Day 102 and System
241. ephones in Calling Group 1 NOTE For touch tone telephones only if your Loudspeaker Paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Privacy F07 Press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the your extension as needed You can use Privacy only with a system telephone Considerations Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights You cannot dial the Privacy code manually or use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls Privacy can be turned on and off at any time even during a call Users cannot join calls by using pool buttons regardless of the Automatic Extension Privacy setting or the state of the Privacy button If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if you need to have co workers join conversations you can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed you must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned Automatic Extension Privacy is appropriate for use with single line telephones Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on
242. equired Telephone Programming For all telephones you must program these features Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone selects a line or pool when the user picks up the handset If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number Extension Name Display to assign a user s name to the extension Like Automatic Line Selection you must do this procedure immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display first change Automatic Line Selection press Central Tel Program redial the extension number and then use Extension Name Display m Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line or pool For single line telephones you must now also program all other extension features For non display system telephones you may also want to program all extension features at this point To erase the current programming from a button press the button and then press Wic HFAN Automatic Line Selection This feature determines the line or pool a user is connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines or pools in the order specified by Automatic Line Selection and selects the first available line or pool For example if you specify outside lin
243. er ID Log LIne Association Dial Dial a system extension Dial a system line Press Nextitem to program another extension To associate another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension and repeat above steps Caller ID Log All Calls Dial E O Dial a system extension Call Coverage Rings Dial Dial one digit 1 9 for the of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension 2 rings Y For Centralized Telephone Programming see previous pages VMS Cover Rings Dial Dial one digit 1 9 for the of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging 3 rings Y Copy Settings Dial 00 Dial a source extension Dial target extension s PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Outgoing Call Restriction Allowed Phone Number Lists Dial 00 Dial Dial a system extension Dial a list 1 8 Dial 1 No Restriction Y Dial a list entry 01 10 2 Inside Only intercom To add entry 3 Local Only intercom and local Dial the telephone up to 12 digits Press to program another extension Press Press to remove a list entry Press to program another list entry Toll Call Prefix To program another extension Dial Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a Dial 1 0 1 plus Area Code and
244. er feature Refer to the device s user manual m For every auxiliary device connected to your system either set the device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all of the settings associated with it Refer to the documentation with your voice messaging system for complete details If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 lf you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone What to do Check to see if you are using proper speakerphone technique m Avoid places with high background noise m Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking m Face the telephone and stay within two feet of it m Place your telephone at least six inches from the edge of your desk If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Other Telephone Problems 11 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 2 lf the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty telephone or cord See System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 5 If the system is set for rotary d
245. er listed on the front inside cover m If the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 in All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights m f any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Problems 11 24 Troubleshooting All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the ON position O if you have a five slot carrier m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover m If the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 m f any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Possible Cause 2 The power outlet is faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio m fthe appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fuse box or call an electrician m If the appliance works call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Multiple Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The
246. er on Intercom Hold on a system telephone 6 22 placing calls on 6 21 hold A 6 changing disconnect time 4 36 on a single line telephone 6 22 Hold Button 8 40 Hold Disconnect Time 4 36 Hold Disconnect Time 203 4 36 Hold Reminder Tone 6 21 8 32 Hold Exclusive 8 32 Holding a Call 8 32 8 40 Hotel Motel Features outgoing call restriction button 114 7 17 wake up service button 115 7 20 Hotline 4 37 IN 5 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use using 8 41 Hotline 603 4 37 Hun Group Extensions 4 31 Hunt Group Extensions 505 4 31 Hunt Groups off loading call activity 8 37 programming using 8 37 Hunt Groups see also Group Call Distribution Hybrid Mode 1 4 Idle Line Preference see Automatic Line Selection Industry Standard Devices see Standard Devices Initial System Programming 3 1 3 16 initialize the system 2 14 In Range Out of Building IROB Protectors 9 2 In Range Out of Building IROB protectors 9 2 Inside Call making an 6 18 inspecting Caller ID 8 19 Installation cover 2 18 overview 2 1 installation control unit 2 4 environmental requirements 2 2 telephones 2 18 wall mounting 5 slot carrier 2 8 stand alone processor module 2 5 wall mounting the control unit 2 4 installation wall mounting 2 slot carrier 2 5 Intercom Auto Dial Button 6 5 8 5 Intercom Autodialer 1 11 7 3 8 5 connecting 2 24 problems 11 7 Intercom Call making an
247. er the desired two digit system line number Direct Extension Dial Features 7 10 Operator Features To assign or unassign Direct Extension Dial press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting Y To specify another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all desired lines Select another procedure or exit programming mode Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Use this feature to program a button to turn Direct Extension Dial DXD on and off Direct Extension Dial permits an outside caller to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without the aid of the operator With Release 3 0 or later DXD calls also can be transferred directly into a Calling Group It is ideal for outside callers who frequently talk with specific employees or service groups and know the extension number they are trying to reach When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Direct Extension Dial the system picks it up after a specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension Hunt Group or Calling Group Considerations This feature is available only on the system telephone at extension 10 Use only one automated answering option for incoming calls either this feature the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system
248. ernal Hotline After approximately three seconds the programmed telephone number is dialed automatically If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again When the call is answered speak into the handset Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Use this feature to ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups G represents a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging you hear a beep and can begin speaking Your voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system telephones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing ekr or by pressing Wic HFA to answer a page is connected to the caller You can group page employees for general announcements this is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system telephones with built in speakers where you want employees to hear announcements Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group m If some extensions in a Calling Group have single line MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephones those extensions are not signaled for voice paged calls to the group because they do not have built in speakers m Ifa Calling Group is in use a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone External Hotline 8 34 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m If you leave the microphone on
249. es Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence Calls forwarded and unanswered at both the originating extension and the forwarded extension are logged as unanswered calls by the Caller ID Logging feature at both extensions If the forwarded call is answered at the forwarded extension it is not logged unless the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 feature is set to log answered calls Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Call Forwarding button 1 Press o0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Do one of the following m Press OO m Press and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature MU the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 8 12 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Call Forwarding on a System Telephone To forward calls
250. es or pools first for an extension but all outside lines or pools are busy the user hears the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker At key extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number If all outside lines are busy the system searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to 05 01 02 03 04 Intercom This way the WATS line is selected first At pooled extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an available line in the main pool pool 880 button 1 then button 2 If all outside lines in the pool are busy the system selects an idle intercom line However you can change the order to accommodate a different automatic line selection For example your boss prefers her individual line line 15 to be selected when she lifts the handset then she wants auxiliary pool 881 to be selected which is used for making international calls To do this set Automatic Line Selection to 15 881 Intercom If a single line telephone user intends to place intercom calls and access system features Automatic Line Selec
251. ess the Station Lock button or Feature DQ On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter a four digit code by using digits 0 9 3 Re enter the four digit code m If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code entered in Step 2 the extension is locked On a button with lights the green light changes to on steady On a display telephone the display shows m Ifthe code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in Step 2 the extension remains unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off Repeat the locking procedure To unlock a locked extension 1 Press the Station Lock button or press Feature A On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension m If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension the extension is unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off m If the code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the extension the extension remains locked On a button with lights the green light remains on steady Repeat the unlocking procedure Station Lock F21 8 59 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Station Lock on a Single Line Telephone To lock a single line touch tone telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press MQM You hear intercom dial tone again 3
252. essor Module Grounding Screw Contact Closure Jack SMDR Jack PC Card Slots 2 Power LED PAGE Jack ____ __ Outside Line Jacks 3 MUSIC ON HOLD Jack for RCA phono plug Extension Jacks 8 Battery Compartment Optional Carriers 5 Slot Carrier Tn gt BZ ne 2 Slot Carrier CA A S E SYSTEM PHONES PARTNER 34D Phone with optional PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Phone TransTalkTM Wireless Phones Optional Modules Optional Devices for the control unit Serial Printer PARTNER Paging System MAIL VS Voice Messaging System y pen i il Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus SE 0 Contact Closure Adjunct Magic on Hold deck PC Cards Backup Restore ASA DXD R2 0 or later Software upgrade R1 0 or later Remote Access R3 0 or later PARTNER Voice Messaging Optional Devices for extension jacks Standard Phone PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System El Answering Machine C4 Fax Machine Y Alert Doorphone PassageWay Adapter Figure 1 1 System Configurations System Components 1 8 System
253. except 10 11 or the first Dial a Contact Closure 1 or 2 two extensions of any 206 or 308 modules Dial 1 1 Second On To remove the doorphone extension 2 3 Seconds On Y Press Remove 3 5 Seconds On 4 Toggle Doorphone Alert Extension Dial Music On Hold Volume Dial any extension except a doorphone Dial extension Dial 1 Mi Dial 1 Not an alert Y gt En 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Ee 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 BEES WV 4 Doorphones 1 amp 2 5 BEES Press to identify another extension 6 BEEBE up to 48 alert extensions per doorphone 7 BE BESS 4 Automated Attendant Extensions Dial Remote Administration Password Dial a system extension Dial Dial 1 Assigned No Password 8 dashes display 2 Not Assigned Y Active password up to 8 alphanumeric characters Press to program another extension Password can only be changed at Extension 10 or 11 Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart follow these instructions first Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 To Enter Programming Mode Press OO Press System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number to be programmed Buttons on to which lines or pools are assigned light up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto D
254. expand The most basic system consists of a PARTNER ACS processor module which supports three lines and eight extensions Using these lines and extensions you can add optional devices and telephones to configure your system to meet your needs To expand the system to include more lines and extensions simply attach additional modules and a carrier to contain them The term control unit refers to the PARTNER ACS processor module and any other modules in the system N warnine There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES Configurations You can install the PARTNER ACS system in one of three basic configurations all of which must be wall mounted m Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module This configuration does not use a carrier m 2 slot carrier which can hold the PARTNER ACS processor module and one other module m 5 slot carrier which can hold up to five modules including the PARTNER ACS processor module The processor module resides in the center slot This carrier includes a cover In either carrier only one of the modules must be a PARTNER ACS processor module The modules slide into the carrier which channels power to the system System Components 1 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use CONTROL UNIT PARTNER ACS Proc
255. extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pickup Group Extensions 501 Use this feature to assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature helps when a user needs to answer calls on lines or pools not assigned to his or her telephone The system supports up to four Pickup Groups Considerations m You can assign an extension to as many as four different Pickup Groups m You can assign extensions where extra alerts Such as a loud bell are installed to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call m For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup I66G on page 8 39 Programming To assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 Pd 0 N Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AOO at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting w Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another extension press Next i
256. fax machine for delayed pickup m Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to delayed ring or no ring m Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension This is the recommended way Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine Automatic Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines Release 3 0 or Later When an incoming call is answered by PVM PMVS PARTNER MAIL or ASA DXD the PARTNER ACS determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to the fax machine it automatically transfers the call to a fax hunt group see Setting Up Fax Machines on page 9 16 For this feature to work you must have a voice messaging system or ASA DXD You must also configure your system in one of these ways m Partner ACS as a stand alone module m 308EC R3 0 module in slot 1 any modules in remaining slots m 200 206 400 module in slot 1 308EC module prior to R3 0 in any other slot This feature is not supported if you have a 308EC module prior to R3 0 in slot 1 Manual Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines Release 2 0 or Later There are two situations when you want to transfer a call to your fax machine m You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep Transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension m You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax
257. ffect lengthen the time Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later Use this feature to create a password for remote or local PC administration of the system except for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version To perform remote administration the remote party must have the password created by the System Administrator This feature prevents unauthorized use of the remote administration capability Considerations m This feature can be used only from a system telephone m The password can be changed only locally at Extension 10 or 11 It cannot be changed at the PC m You must enter a password before you can use remote administration m Only one administration tool can be active at a time If remote administration is active local administration is blocked If local administration is active and you start a remote session the local session drops Programming To program a password 1 At extension 10 or 11 press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program ADG The Remote Password prompt appears REMOTE PASSWORD Dashes appear if there is no current password If there is a password it appears in place of the dashes Enter or change the password by entering the two digit character codes found in Table 5 1 on page 5 4 The password can contain up to eight alphanumeric characters To save the password press Ente The bottom line of the display shows the password as it has been entered To rem
258. fic extension or group without the assistance of the receptionist Programming To set up lines for Group Call Distribution 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 19 Groups of Extensions 4 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 To assign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w m 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 5 Doone of the following m To program another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Night Service Group Extensions 504 Use this feature to assign extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing se
259. fter dialing the number but before hanging up To redial a stored number press the programmed button again or press Feature O again Send All Calls You can use Call Coverage or VMS Cover with Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to your voice mailbox m If Call Coverage is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension This allows callers to receive coverage without waiting for the number of rings specified with Call Coverage Rings m If VMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to immediately send that call and subsequent calls to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without waiting for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings m If Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that coverage call and all subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension If there is no answer at the covering extension the calls go to your voice mailbox after the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings Using Send All Calls To send a covered call immediately to the covering extension m If Call Coverage is not turned on while the call is ringing press the Call Coverage button The ringing call is sent immediately to the
260. g w To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Cover Rings Use this feature to define the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox Use VMS Cover Rings 117 for Release 2 0 or earlier systems to program the number of rings for all extensions programmed for VMS Cover Use VMS Cover Rings 321 for Release 3 0 and later systems to program the number of rings on a per extension basis Considerations VMS Cover Rings also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 If an extension has VMS Cover F15 or Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Voice Messaging Systems 9 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming For VMS Cover Rings 117 To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QQ at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a setting 1 9 3 is the factory setting For example to set VMS Cover Rings to 4 press Next Data or Prev Data until a display similar to the following appears VMS Cover Rings 4 Rings 3 Select a
261. g w m 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension m 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension m 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension To identify another alert extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Doorphone Programming 9 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Use these features to identify an extension to which a doorphone is connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension for the first doorphone and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension for the second doorphone Considerations m An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions m You should not assign doorphones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions m You cannot bridge two doorphones together m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines and or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the doorphone extension Automatic Line Selectio
262. g System Programming 3 2 Initial System Programming m starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 m feature when followed by enters or exits programming mode 7 enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and the Forced Account Code List 409 PA FA Y GG HH l 1l JJ FF Next Next Next Procedure Mm Item Mm Data Mm Remove U Vv w X EE DD Prev Prev Prev prestar Item Data Enter Q R S T cc BB M o P AA Z G J K L A c D E F System Central Tel LS LS LS Message Program Program Feature J C G ON _ Next Next a Item y Prev Prev Item Next Data y Prev Data A Enter ES AS i i PARTNER 34D System Central Tel Message Program Program LJ g Feature 1 Pd Ciclo J PARTNER 18D Figure 3 1 Programming Overlays Using System Programming 3 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Button Locations When you program from a PARTNER telephone at extens
263. ge a specific extension s operation from Pooled to Key Refer to Key Extensions to assign lines to those extensions Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove the main pool assign auxiliary pools or change the location of the button used to select an auxiliary pool at specific extensions The location of the two main pool buttons cannot be changed Pool Access Restriction 315 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines in specific pools m Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line or pool starts ringing at each extension that has the line or pool Lines are factory set to Immediate Ring and pools are factory set to No Ring m Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line or pool when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call For extensions with tip ring telephones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables tip ring telephones to access equipment features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on tip ring telephones they hear intercom dial tone To access a pool they can dial the pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 or dial 9 to access the first available line or pool in the sequence Customizing Extensions Use the following features to customize an extension Coverage features Line Coverage Extension 20
264. ging Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 14 Upgrading the System For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plugs from those extension jacks in the control unit Then reconnect the plug from 32 into extension jack 29 and the plug from 29 into extension jack 32 Now the users can take their respective telephones to their new locations keep the same extension numbers and retain the telephones programmed settings Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use PPPS a A Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions SS SS 22 A A AA AAA AAA AAA A A OO 10 16 Troubleshooting Contents OVENVICW dl a Ce alg See A Sa RR ee es Customer Self Service Center on the INteMmetss css oa gus aes ewe A pee dee When You Need Help 00000 cee eee ete a System Release Status F59 2 0 0 0 00 cee o Power Failure Operation ii ciceess ee eae kere iene woe BOE REE Battery Replacement ocio aa ra seats kee iG Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm 6 0 ee System Telephone Problems 0 00 cece cece eee eens a System Telephone Does Not Ring 0 cee eee eee System Telephone Does Not Work 00 0 cece eee eee Display Shows Only 16 Characters per Line Display S INCOMm Cl lt j 24 aes bene eeue he
265. gnal a predetermined co worker s extension Manual Signaling is typically used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another call You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep ring or voice signal the user at the target extension Considerations m A PARTNER or MLS telephone is required at both extensions to use this feature You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target extension number on a button Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to an Auto Dial button m You can have only one button per extension either on the system telephone or on the Intercom Autodialer for a target extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button The lights next to the button show calling activity m If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutters to identify your extension as the signaling extension m You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch transfer Hotline 8 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m Pressing a Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press Spkr press intercom and then press the Manual Signaling button m To respond to a signal th
266. gnment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension this is the recommended way m Incoming fax detection is activated automatically by assigning extensions to Hunt Group 8 m Ifa PARTNER MAIL system is connected to the system and fax detection is being done via PARTNER MAIL no extensions should be assigned to Hunt Group 8 m If there are no touch tone receivers capable of detecting a CNG tone the call is treated as an incoming voice call m ltcan take up to eight seconds after a call is answered before the system determines that the incoming call is a fax call The voice messaging system message should be at least this long so that the CNG tone can be detected before the message ends and the call can be transferred Fax Machines 9 22 Using Auxiliary Equipment m You may use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a fax call at the extension and interrupting it Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Hunt Group prompt enter 8 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the desired extension number 4 To assign or remove an extension from Hunt Group 8 press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting w 5 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on th
267. gramming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a manual backup by using Backup Programming Manual 124 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You tried to do a manual backup by using Backup Programming Manual 124 but the Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object gently push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 11 1 on page 11 18 and try the procedure again You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause An automatic or manual backup was in progress at the time you requested a manual backup Problems with Manual Backup 11 19 P
268. gs Release 3 0 m 303 Display Language and later m 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 001 Outgoing Call acetietion m 305 Abbreviated Ringing m 307 Forced Account Code Entry m 308 Distinctive Ring m 405 Disallowed List Assignments m 408 Allowed List Assignments m 501 Pickup Group Extensions m 502 Calling Group Extensions m 504 Night Service Group m 505 Hunt Group Extensions m 8309 Intercom Dial Tone m 310 Automatic VMS Cover m 311 External Hotline m 601 Fax Machine Extensions m 607 AA Extensions m 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy m 313 Line Access Mode Line Ringing m 314 Pool Extension Assignment Bogie Contacy Closure reup m 315 Pool Access Restriction m Automatic Line Selection m 316 Call Waiting m Line Ringing Considerations m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly m Pooled extension settings can be copied to key extensions except for extension 10 Key extension settings can be copied to pooled extensions Copy Settings 399 4 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AOOO at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from At the Data
269. hae 8 15 a Using Call Pickup on a System Telephone 00 0c eee eee 8 16 a Using Call Pickup on a Single Line Telephone 0 00 e eee eee 8 16 Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 8 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use GallerD Features o 36a ica eae ela ae aes oP oe howe ee eed RSE Vee 8 18 a Caller ID InspeciiFi cs cots ig wean x O64 a da Ken aes 8 19 a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 20 00 cee 8 20 Caller ID Name Display F16 0 0 c cece eee eens 8 25 Conference Drop F06 0 cece eee een eee eee 8 26 a Considerations a iia raras das da ede ae kaw aed a ae wee dake Qo Bah ada Sea 8 26 POT MM a ada Sete sales mate asas Bae es Rea ee 8 26 Using Conference Drop on a System Telephone 0 00 0 eee eee 8 27 Using Conference Drop on a Single Line Telephone s nananana naene 8 27 Contact Closure F41 and F42 0 ccc nee 8 27 a Considerations O eae a Rae Pale RES ga 8 27 a POGTATINIING Sars Se a ad OA oO fe ee da Core a O te e o a E 8 28 Using Contact Closure on a System Telephone 0000 eee eee 8 28 Using Contact Closure on a Single Line Telephone ooooooooo 8 28 Direct Line Pickup Features o o o oo oocooco 0c eens 8 29 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL 00 002 8 29 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line 18LL
270. hart follow these instructions first To Program at an extension use the following procedure To Start programming Press OO The green light next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings You can program the remaining buttons with telephone number extensions numbers or system features To assign a name to the extension press left meco and then enter the character codes To Erase the current programming from a button press the button then press ma Press the programmed button Press mioma To End Programming Mode Press OO Icon Description Vv Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart Account Code Entry Press a programmable button Press Extension Name Display Press left Enter the character codes for the name See table Character Codes Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press Dial a two digit code 80 99 Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number Call Pickup
271. has an auto answer feature turn it off Repeat Steps 1 5 for each additional scanner Doorphone Programming When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system telephone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls If you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them To use the doorphone functionality program the following features Doorphone Alert Extensions Doorphone Extension Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Use this feature to identify extensions that are signaled when a doorphone button is pressed Considerations You cannot bridge two doorphones together f Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled m Ifa Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct controls a door lock consider assigning the Doorphone Alert Extensions to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Only extensions assigned to that Contact Closure Group can activate the door lock Programming To identify doorphone alert extensions 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first alert system extension number Press until the appropriate value appears m Notan Alert Extension the factory settin
272. have up to four Calling Groups For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G on page 8 34 Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group In addition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this helps in making paging announcements to all employees Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline telephones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline telephones to a Calling Group m Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the system telephones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging I 70 on page 8 46 Groups of Extensions 4 30 Programming System Options Programming To create a Calling Group 1 AOON Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ 0 2 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting w Do one of the following m To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat S
273. he Fax Management Feature On any system telephone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering see Table 9 1 You can also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Table 9 1 Fax Management Button Lights Light Pattern Indication Red broken flutter Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering If the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flutter Fax transfer return A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you Programming for Fax Management Button To program a Fax Management button 1 Assign the fax machine extension by using Fax Machine Extensions 601 2 Program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing on page 8 4 Fax Machines 9 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later Use this feature to allow voice calls and fax calls to be received on the s
274. he PC Card and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the processor module is corrupted What to do Try to do a backup using the manual backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 to test the system m If the backup completes successfully the problem may be solved An automatic backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 m If the backup fails try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Problems with Automatic Backup 11 18 Troubleshooting Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support document to order a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause Changes were being made to system pro
275. he batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming revert to the factory settings If you have a Backup Restore PC Card do a backup before changing the batteries NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions Change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries See Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 12 Overview 10 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use Using a PC Card Follow these steps to upgrade your system s software with a PC card A CAUTION Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 1 If you have a 5 slot carrier move the carrier s On Off switch to the Off position O See Figure 10 1 On Off Switch Handle T Screw Figure 10 1 On Off Switch on a 5 Slot Carrier 2 For all types of installations disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet 3 If you do not have a 5 slot carrier go to Step 4 If you have a 5 slot carrier a Loosen the screw on the lower front of the cover b Place one hand on the handle on the bottom front of the cover a
276. he display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all the lines that you want to identify Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Features 7 6 Operator Features Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Use this feature to determine how the system handles Automatic System Answer calls after the greeting plays There are three available modes Hold places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available Ring continues to ring and the green light next to the line button continues to flash at all extensions that have access to the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available Disconnect ends the call immediately after the Automatic System Answer greeting plays Considerations If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold calls are placed on hold at extension 10 however any extension with access to the line on which the call is held can retrieve the call If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold and a call is placed on hold for longer than one minute the system generates a short Hold Reminder Tone at extension 10 This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold or Disconnect you can intercept a
277. he display of the telephone at extension 10 To replace a module or modules in a stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 1 2 Remove the power cord from the wall outlet Check the slack in the wires If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free label and disconnect the wires before continuing Do one of the following m Fora stand alone configuration remove the screws at the top and bottom of the processor module and remove the module from the wall Go to Step 8 Fora 2 slot carrier configuration remove the long screw at the bottom of the modules see Figure 10 6 Replacing Modules 10 6 Upgrading the System Figure 10 6 Removing the Bottom Screw 4 Remove the screws that attach the carrier to the modules see Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 Removing the Carrier Screws 5 Pull the carrier to the right to remove it see Figure 10 8 Replacing Modules 10 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use Figure 10 8 Pulling Off the Carrier 6 Slide the top module to the left to disengage its interlocking mounting tracks from the processor module Mounting Ea Tracks Figure 10 9 Disengaging the Mounting Tracks If you
278. he hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the tip ring devices connected to your system dial out at the same time You can identify several extensions as external hotlines Do not assign an external hotline to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC module which are reserved as power failure extensions Use Hotline 603 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension Pooled Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines or pools first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number assign a line for use only by this extension Set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines or pools assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call line or pool restrictions assigned to an external hotline External Hotline 311 4 26 Programming System Options Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the outside number from being dialed m Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Gr
279. he old module see Figure 10 13 Maia a ae Figure 10 13 Removing the Module 8 If you are replacing a module with one of a different type make sure that all 400 or 200 modules are installed to the right of all 308EC or 206 modules and that the processor module remains in the center slot 9 To insert the replacement once the module is properly seated firmly push the center of the module until the connectors on the module lock into place and the module is attached to the rear of the carrier For proper engagement of the connectors the module must be inserted straight into the carrier see Figure 10 14 A slight click indicates the connectors are engaged Carrier Shelf Figure 10 14 Proper Insertion of the Module Replacing Modules 10 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Z caution Do not force the module Use the carrier shelf as a reference and do not tilt slant or rotate the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it Connect the line and extension cords one at a time making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module See Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 Reconnect the power cord Z caution
280. her analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system The primary application for call accounting devices is accounting or pricing of the calls Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 34 Using Auxiliary Equipment The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module and can also print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension See the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system Connecting a Device to the SMDR Jack You can connect an SMDR printer a PC or a Call Accounting device connected to a serial printer or PC port to the SMDR jack on the processor module The SMDR printer produces reports that monitor call activity Follow these steps to connect a device to the SMDR jack see Figure 9 17 1 If you are connecting a device to the SMDR jack on a Release 3 0 or later processor module you must install a ferrite core on the SMDR cable right below the PC Card slots by doing the following see Figure 9 18 a Wrap the cable around the ferrite core once b Snap the core closed Insert one end of a D8W modular cord into the SMDR jack the second jack on the processor module Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Plug the other end of the cord into a 355A adapter Plug
281. her extension System Flow Chart Extensions Continued BHeEEBEEEHEEEHEEHEEHEEHEEEHEHEEeEEEeeH CO Line Access Mode Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Pooled vy all extensions except 10 2 Key Y extension 10 only Press to program another extension BEHEEBEEEEEEHEEHEEHEHEEHEHEHEHEHeeEe E Pool Extension Assignment Dial Dial a system extension to remove x existing pool assignments press before selecting a line Dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 Dial 1 Assigned Y 880 2 Not Assigned Y 881 882 883 3 Select Button then press a programmable button auxiliary pools only Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps BEHEEEBEEEEEHEEHEEHEHEEHEHEHEHEeEeEe E BHEEEEHEEEHEEHEHEBEHEBEHEHEBEHEHeEeBeeeee NE Pool Access Restriction Dial Dial a system extension Dial a pool number 880 881 882 or 883 Dial 1 No Restriction Y 880 2 Outgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access Press to program another pool To program another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps BHREHEEEHEEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEeEeee Call Waiting Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Press to program another extension Caller ID Log Answered Calls Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y Press Nextitem to program another extension Call
282. hine is to cover transferred or coverage calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension This way the answering machine picks up transferred or coverage calls before they return to the transfer return extension or are sent to the covering extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Auto Attendant An auto attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the auto attendant answers calls and tells callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts or 3 for Service You can set up an auto attendant for immediate call handling or delayed call handling A common use of an auto attendant is as a backup for the operator If the operator cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings the auto attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Please hold for the operator or dial an extension number now This prevents calls from going unanswered Connect an auto attendant to any extension on the system To Use an Auto Attendant Follow the instructions packaged with the auto attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode To Program To program the system for an auto attendant 1 Use Line Assignment 30
283. hine s to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the call Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine answers calls that ring at a certain extension Figure 9 4 It is useful for the following situations m When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine m When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls m When outside calls come through an operator and are transferred to the extension m When an extension has a private line Figure 9 4 Personal Answering Machine To Retrieve Messages To retrieve messages from a personal answering machine do one of the following Goto the machine to manually retrieve messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Answering Machines 9 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment m From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension or call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code To Program 1 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring 2 Ifthe lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can If the answering mac
284. hone Programming to specify when the line starts ringing at each extension that has the line m Line Access Restriction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line m The system automatically assigns the new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection NOTE Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To add a new line without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use Pooled Extensions You can add new lines to existing pools if your system is configured for Hybrid mode To assign a new line to a pooled extension as an individual line use the features in Key Extensions above If you add an outside line to your system for use in an existing pool use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line and Pool Line Assignment 207 to add the line to an existing pool NOTE Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Selection and
285. hones During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display telephone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left button becomes and the right button becomes Central Tel Program The Programming Overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming m Next Procedure and Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure If a procedure instructs you to press Next Procedure Prev Procedure pressing these buttons one after the other enables you to repeat the current programming procedure 7 and cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line a pool an extension or a telephone list entry E and cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments returns the current setting to the factory setting When you are programming Line Assignment 301 pressing removes lines from an extension when you are programming Pool Extension Assignment 314 pressing removes pools from an extension 7 ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List m starts the System Programming process Usin
286. hones Spanish at an extension s display the language chosen for extension 10 becomes the language for the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR reports Table A 7 System Manager Features Continued Cross Reference of Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Monitoring Messages Change the extension information that N A Extension Name Display 5 4 appears on display telephones that have messages Set up voice messaging system to take N A Voice Messaging Systems 9 39 calls Set up extensions to receive messages N A Fax Machines 9 14 from a fax machine that has a delivery for them Set up Calling Groups to receive N A Calling Group Extensions 4 30 messages from co workers Obtaining reports Obtain a report on incoming and outgoing N A Station Message Detail 9 32 calls including account codes if Recording programmed Get a report on the way the system is N A Station Message Detail 9 32 programmed Recording Troubleshooting Find out what to do when callers on hold N A Calls on Hold are Disconnected 11 23 are being disconnected Make your system more secure from toll N A Dialing Restrictions and 4 16 fraud Permissions Table A 8 Customizing Your Telephone Activity For Feature or Section Page Using the line buttons on your telephone All Buttons and Indicators 6 1 Using the display to screen incoming Display Caller ID Inspect 8 19 cal
287. ht next to the Auto Dial button flashes Press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 or lift the handset and replace it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction Button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 7 18 Operator Features Station Unlock F22 Use this feature to unlock a specific user s locked extension Use this feature when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension Considerations a This feature is available only at extension 10 or 11 Do not program this feature on a button m Use Station Lock to lock and unlock from an extension Using Station Unlock on a System Telephone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press feature O 2 Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button for the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked If that extension used a Station Lock button with lights to activate the feature the green light goes off Using Station Unlock on a Single Line Telephone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Lift the handset You hear the intercom dial tone Press H 3 Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked Station Unlock F22 7 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Wake Up Service Button 115 Use this feature to program a butt
288. ial number or features To Program Another Feature At the Same Extension After you program one feature continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature To Change Setting For Another Extension Press Dial the new extension s number To Erase A Feature or Auto Dial Button Press the programmed button Press mioma To End Programming Mode Press OO Icon Description Vv Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart NOTE Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display then Ling Ringing first Automatic Line Selection Press Press the line pool intercom buttons in the desired order Press Key Extension Outside lines left Vv Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 left eran right Vv Pools 881 883 individual lines Press a programmable button Account Code Entry Press W Background Music Press a programmable button OR Extension Name Display Press left Enter the character codes for the name See table Character Codes Press O Call Coverage Press a programmable button Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destinatio
289. ialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long What to do Reset the interval by using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m If you can hear the called party answer the problem is solved m If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted Possible Cause The Star Code Dial Delay setting is not inserting a long enough pause allowing part of the telephone number to be dialed before the second dial tone from the central office is established What to do Use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase the Star Code Dial Delay setting Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m Ifthe Recall feature works the problem is solved m fthe Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Recall feature works properly the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still disc
290. ialing two digits between 80 and 99 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank Enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it The number can be up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable Do one of the following m To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code m To remove a Personal Speed Dial number enter the number s two digit code and press once Continue programming or exit programming mode Using Personal Speed Dial on a System Telephone To use Personal Speed Dial on a system telephone 1 2 Lift the handset or press before dialing Do one of the following m If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number m If you want to call using a specific pool press the pool button or press and the three digit pool access code Press Feature Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display telephone Using
291. ictions and Permissions 4 22 Programming System Options Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Use this feature to specify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension Considerations If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead Outgoing Call Restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup ldle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List 407 and the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Also if a System Password 403 is defined MLS system telephone users can enter it to override restrictions You can program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 for information If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed telephone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code If you want to restrict the use of star codes include them in the Disallowed Phone Number Lists Programming To identify the types of outgoing calls that
292. identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AH OOG at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number Hotline 603 4 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use At the Data prompt enter the alert extension number use 70 for the loudspeaker paging system A display similar to the following appears Internal Hotline Ext 33 Data 32 Do one of the following m To change the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 m To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remove To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press Next tem or Prev item until the new hotline extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 Use this feature to determine the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone NOTE Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Programming
293. igits assigned to the call This code typically is used for charging calls to a specific client project or department Talk This is the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system The talk time is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds If the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial feature this field does not include the time the caller listens to the greeting or waits for someone to answer the call For all other calls the time in this field is the same as the time in the Duration field This field is included on the call report only if SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active Output Format Use the following RS 232 serial transmission protocol for SMDR records 1200 baud No parity 8 data bits 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the format described above refer to the printer s instructions or contact the printer s manufacturer if you need help Call Accounting Devices You can send call information to a call accounting device if you want to furt
294. ign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension m Ifa System Password 403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension you must enter it before entering the account code m If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports If a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report m You do not need a forced account code to answer incoming calls Programming To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ 0 Z at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned Y Forced Account Codes 4 28 4 5 Programming System Options To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code List 409 Forced Account Code List lets you create a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once a list is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid account code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature
295. igned you may need to add more lines m If an appropriate number of lines are assigned go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 One or more local telephone company lines in the pool are faulty What to do At extension 10 try to access each individual line assigned to the pool Other Telephone Problems 11 12 Troubleshooting m If the lines accessed from individual line buttons on extension 10 are still faulty refer to Possible Cause 7 in Other Problems with Telephones Trouble Making Outside Calls m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Calls Are Answered Automatically A call rings once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause 1 Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on What to do Check to see if Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off by pressing the programmed button at extension 10 m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is not turned on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 An auxiliary device answers when it should not this could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn off its auto answ
296. in a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press when storing the number Touch Tone Enable F08 8 61 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Touch Tone Enable button _ Pd oO N Press Feature OQO Press a programmable button Press Feature O 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Touch Tone Enable From a system telephone press the programmed button or press Feature 0 8 when you need to enter touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up VMS Cover F15 Use this feature to program a button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is three rings You must have a voice messaging system to use VMS Cover and you can use it only from a system telephone Considerations m Program VMS Cover on a button with lights m VMS Cover does not apply to coverage calls forwarded calls group calls parked calls transfer return calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls or voice signaled calls m If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility you can program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as n
297. ine from all extensions that have the line assigned m You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools created with this feature to specific extensions If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all lines in a specific pool you must restrict the extension by using Pool Access Restriction 315 Programming To change the assignment of lines to pools 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AHA 2 0 7 Enter the first line to be programmed A display similar to the following appears Lines to Pools L08 2 Pool 880 Enter the desired value 1 5 m No Pool m 2 Main Pool 880 all lines assigned the factory setting Y m 3 Pool 881 m 4 Pool 882 Pool Programming 4 45 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m 5 Pool 883 4 To program another line press Next tem or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Recall Timer Duration 107 Use this feature to change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the telephone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central
298. ing Auto Dialing gM og Ceo SEN ca bate Ae a oh Io SAME AS 8 6 Background Music F19 0 00 cece eee eee eee ees 8 7 a CONSIDEIAONS wise conde A weet doe et deed ea ab tae 8 7 cea 23 254 ROM on 5 hee ec Oe st OF ee EO a a Bg Soho A Ot AO 8 7 a Using Background Music lt br ane oweea Sakon ta ada Oa a ace 8 8 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Laler i s cas taco ti bideiabiedariaiag bide ae Sette scents 8 8 s Considerations vota aise bs ae O eae eee aie ey eee ee ee 8 8 a PLOGIAMMING keen es ee AEDEP 8 10 Using Call Coverage at a System Telephone 00000 eee eee 8 10 a Using Call Coverage at a Single Line Telephone 000e ee eee 8 11 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX ooo 8 11 a Considerations 5 38 pe EN a a ad e SUE ed a C4 eset s 8 11 e PLOGIAMMING saci g nk Aa ha ga dew Races ears Sed Sead as Soe ad ABs 8 12 Using Call Forwarding on a System Telephone 0 00 e eee eee 8 13 a Using Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone 200005 8 13 Call Pare a4 Sch ease DAA o pai aid ela 8 14 me CONSIdS A TONS veais vello Grams el a arate A ao es 8 14 a Using Call Park on a System Telephone 00000 eee ee eee 8 14 a Using Call Park on a Single Line Telephone 000 0 eee eee 8 15 Call Pickup ISAK E se dee a Posada oe eee ere 8 15 a Considerati S estar aes Pee eas Adee A SLAM ee Ae bes 8 15 a Programming cA tt i et Ak Le ee AUN Bt ie in dd UAE eh
299. ing Centralized Telephone Programming Most features also can be programmed on a system telephone at the user s extension except for the following Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing and Call Screening F25 always must be programmed by using Centralized Telephone Programming m Ifan extension has a single line telephone you must program all features for the extension by using Centralized Telephone Programming m f an extension has a non display system telephone you must use Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display for the extension During Centralized Telephone Programming the display telephone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the telephone See Using System Programming on page 3 2 for more information about System Programming and the use of overlays To program a telephone from extension 10 or 11 follow these steps 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 2 Press D 0 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 3 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature Skip to Step 4 Using Centralized Telephone Program
300. ing mode Allowed List Assignments 408 Use this feature to assign up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists to a specific extension You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Programming To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension _ PF oO N Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 4 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 8 To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value appears m Assigned to extension m 2 Not Assigned to extension the factory setting Y Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another list to this extension press until the list number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers You can create up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each A Disallowed Phone Number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 2 and the wildcard character displayed as
301. ing programming 4 52 System Reset 728 4 52 System Reset Programming Saved 4 6 4 52 System Restore problems 11 21 Bad File Try Again 11 21 Empty File 11 21 Incompatible Versions 11 21 Insert Valid Card 11 21 Restore Complete but calls disconnected 11 22 Restore Failed Try Again 11 22 settings reverted to default settings 11 22 system settings changing 10 12 Index System Speed Dial 4 53 8 57 marked numbers 4 53 using single line telephone 8 58 system telephone 8 57 system telephone problems 11 4 11 8 System Telephones using 6 1 system telephones connecting to tip ring devices 9 3 speaker 6 9 System Time 3 9 System Time 103 3 9 T telephone cords connecting 2 17 telephone problems single line telephones 11 8 system telephones 11 4 display characters 11 5 display shows low power 11 6 does not work 11 5 incorrect display 11 6 Intercom Autodialer 11 7 MLC 6 telephone does not ring 11 8 no Caller ID display 11 6 no Caller ID information 11 7 no ringing 11 4 Priv instead of Called ID 11 7 Record a Call not working 11 8 Telephone Programming auto dial buttons 7 1 8 4 centrally at extension 10 or 11 3 6 options 3 12 telephone programming 3 1 Telephone Programming Required programming required telephone 5 2 Telephones touch tone phone 6 10 telephones assembling 2 18 buttons 6 1 connecting and testing 2 23 desk mounting 2 18 dial tone single
302. ing to another extension All Transfer 6 25 At another extension All Call Pickup 8 15 For another person or group of people All Call Coverage 8 8 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me 8 11 Calling Group Extensions 4 30 If you are part of a group All Calling Group Extensions 4 30 Waiting for you after you hear the Call All Call Waiting 4 14 Waiting tone That come to your extension while you All Call Forwarding 8 11 are at another extension Call Follow Me Conferencing and joining calls Conferencing inside and outside parties All Conference Calls 6 23 where the inside parties do not share a line Joining calls of inside parties who share All Joining Calls 6 28 a line Preventing others from joining your calls All Automatic Extension Privacy 4 2 Privacy 8 47 Dialing An inside call All Making Calls 6 15 An outside call All Making Calls 6 15 An inside or outside number with one Auto Dialing 8 4 touch An Account Code for billing to a project All Account Code Entry 8 2 or client during or before a call By entering a 3 digit code for a party that All System Speed Dial 4 53 and 8 57 people in your company call often By entering a 2 digit code for a party you All Personal Speed Dial 8 55 call often telephones with 10 or fewer buttons Outside of normal office hours All Night Service Group Extensions 4 34 A number you dialed before All Last Number Redial 8 51 Save Number Redial 8 53 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation
303. inging 209 2 2 eee 4 57 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 000 ccc eee eens 4 57 s CONSIGSIAlIONS esera ea din ae ae Ree Ae aed ree A eee teed wea ea wa 4 58 els co 4 C28 punk Stim Cant dS A A and Ss gS eee a eek 4 59 4 iii PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use 4 iv Programming System Options 4 Overview As a System Administrator after you have initialized the system you should program features for the entire system In addition you need to be able to back up and restore programming Many of these features affect individual extensions but they are programmed from extension 10 or 11 or from a PC connected to the system For instructions on system programming see Using System Programming on page 3 2 The features are listed alphabetically When a group of features deals with the same overall function they are grouped accordingly for example Doorphone Alert Extensions and Doorphone Extension under Doorphone Programming Overview 4 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Abbreviated Ringing 305 Use this feature to activate or deactivate Abbreviated Ringing at the system telephone at a specific extension When you are on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is Active any incoming call rings only once The green light next to the line or pool button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred cal
304. ion Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 Follow these steps to replace a module in a 5 slot carrier 1 Move the On Off switch to the Off position O 2 Remove the power cord from the wall outlet Replacing Modules 10 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System installation Programming and Use Loosen the screw on the lower front of the carriers cover Then place one hand on the handle on the lower front and the other hand on the top of the cover Gently pull the cover up and away from the carrier see Figure 10 11 Be careful not to break the tabs that attach the cover to the carrier On Off Switch Figure 10 11 Removing the Cover 5 Before installing a module remove the clear plastic protector from the connector area on the rear of the module by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 10 12 Tab Ave IT Tab Figure 10 12 Removing the Plastic Protector 6 Check the slack in the wires If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free label and disconnect the wires Replacing Modules 10 10 Upgrading the System 7 Place one hand on top of the module With the other hand grip the plastic bracket on the bottom front of the module and pull out t
305. ion 10 or 11 the button you press on the telephone at the programming extension may be in a different location on the telephone being programmed Figure 3 2 on page 3 4 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER telephone For example the button labeled E on the PARTNER 34D telephone in Figure 3 2 is in the bottom row The equivalent button on the PARTNER 18D telephone is in the leftmost position of the second row from the bottom If your system has a mix of PARTNER and MLS telephones see Appendix D Programming Mixed Telephone Types for information about programming from a PARTNER to an MLS telephone or from an MLS to a PARTNER telephone PARTNER 34D Phone N 5 Q R 5 D 5 o o o o o o Lf Oo Oo Oo Oo Do g p ja ja gl Oo A jul o m gl mi EM 50N 500 LPI 8 a soe sO 800 800 80 act SCA BCB ECC CD sce BCF 3 E Ext Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 18D 18 Phone PARTNER 6 Phone 3 alt slo aLA 5LB a a a O Intercom Intercom R S T Q Ext message oLM ON a_O BOP alt aC aK 5L SCE ECF CG 20m QCA CB 0d 0D E zi Ext Message Intercom Intercom Figure 3 2 Button Locations on PARTNE
306. irect Line Pickup Active Line Caller ID information does not appear for ringing calls on lines programmed for Out Only or No Access m Ifa line is assigned to a telephone but is restricted to No Access the line button LEDs show calling activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls Programming To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QOQA at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number to be programmed At the Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension The current restriction appears To change the line restriction for this extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line this is the factory setting w m 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line m 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on that line m 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line Do one of the following To restrict another line at this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restr
307. ithin 45 days of seeing the message NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshold A CAUTION Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming revert to the factory settings If you have a Backup Restore PC Card do a backup before changing the batteries NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 You must have additional PARTNER Remote PC Software to program the system from a PC Change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries See Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 12 Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm If you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 and the automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the default day date time message on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 After correcting the problem that caused the failure you can clear the Backup Failure Alarm by following these steps 1 Press Featu
308. ivated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized greeting Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system either places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flashes disconnects the call Direct Extension Dial When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension or hunt group Call Forwarding Call Follow Me When activated this feature forwards calls to a backup answering extension Call Coverage When activated this feature allows other users to answer calls coming in to the operator s extension Also you can install a voice messaging system to provide an automated backup answering position When the operator is busy on calls or away from the desk the voice messaging system answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings plays a customized greeting requests callers to enter an extension number and transfers the caller to the appropriate extension If no one answers at the destination extension the caller can leave a personal message in that extension s
309. iver and each 400 module has two touch tone receivers The combination of modules in your system determines the number of tip ring devices that can dial simultaneously For example if you have one PARTNER ACS processor module two 206 modules and two 400 modules eight tip ring devices can dial out at the same time If nine tip ring devices try to dial out simultaneously the ninth device does not get dial tone until one of the other eight finishes dialing PARTNER MAIL VS contains its own touch tone receivers and does not require any from the system Single Line Telephones 6 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Because single line telephones do not have system line or pool buttons buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system telephones In addition you cannot perform the following actions at a single line telephone You cannot enter programming mode Because there are no line buttons on single line telephones you must use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to select a specific line otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when you dial a 9 at intercom dial tone Similarly because there are no pool buttons on single line telephones you must dial pool access codes at the intercom dial tone to request access to an idle pooled line See Making Calls on page 6 15 for instructions on using pool access code
310. k with the new rel ease However you may want to consider some additional programming for the features that are new in Release 2 0 or Release 3 0 see Features on page 1 3 Chang 10 12 ing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions Upgrading the System A CAUTION Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade For more information on using the PC Card Software Upgrade see Using a PC Card on page 10 2 For more information on using the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC card see PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation Programming and Use Changing the System Clock You may need to change the system clock for daylight savings time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 to set the current date day and time Adding New Lines How you add new lines to the system depends upon the type of extension you are adding them to Key Extensions You can add individual lines to pooled extensions or add new lines to key extensions all extensions in Key mode in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key using Line Access Mode 301 are key extensions If you add an outside line to your system you may need to adjust some line settings m Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line m Line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions a Line Ringing Centralized Telep
311. kground Music feature broadcasts music over telephone lines The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law In order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives Such as ASCAP or BMI The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually m Background Music stops when you make or answer a call but resumes when the telephone becomes idle again m Ifa system telephone and a single line telephone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the single line telephone s message waiting light does not light if Background Music is on at the system telephone m You can program a Background Music button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch Use a button with lights Call Screening F25 overrides Background Music Programming To program a Background Music button 1 2 Press Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 3 Press Feature DD 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Background Music F19 8 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Background Music To turn Background Music on 1 From a system telephone with a speaker press the programmed button or press Feat
312. kup Failed SystemBusy in System Programming Mode 00 0c eee eee eee ee ee Problems with System Restore 0 000 e eee ee eee Display Shows Insert Valid Cara in System Programming MOde o oocccccccco eee eae Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode 00 0c eee eee tee eee Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode duces cari rr yee peed se eei es Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode v2 6 chad ven cae ewe ewes aa dG Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode 0 000 eee eee a System Programming Settings Reverted to Default SettingS o ooooooccooocrra Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected oooococccocccc eee System Problems ita AAA A ate aot ae Peds 11 i Contents Call Rings Continuously When Answered No One atOiner End circa wis Pa heen ee wane kane 11 23 Calls on Hold Are Disconnected 0 0 ccc eee eens 11 23 a An ASA DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears 00 00 eee 11 23 Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines Are Disconnected 11 23 Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect 0000 cee eee 11 24 a All Calls Disconnecled vecs srian a a iaa a ha ews 11 24 All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights
313. l Considerations An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the extension receiving the call Do not designate an extension associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller AA Extensions 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with auto attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 505 is used to identify the extensions associated with voice messaging system hardware Transfer return calls do not receive call coverage or voice mail coverage If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension Transfer Return Programming 4 55 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call Coverage if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time
314. l until the call returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting you when you are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Considerations m Abbreviated Ringing applies only to system telephones m Abbreviated Ringing is typically set to Not Active for operators and others who handle many calls quickly so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls m Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls m The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ringing is set to Not Active Programming To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 3 0 5 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 To set Abbreviated Ringing press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active incoming calls ring once the factory setting w m 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Use this feature to prevent a user from joining an active call at an extension When Auto
315. l Recording Call reporting This chapter also discusses the programming of Automated Attendants Doorphones Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment Voice Messaging Systems Besides these the chapter explains the connecting of a loudspeaker paging system to the control unit The auxiliary equipment is discussed in alphabetical order In addition you can connect the following devices to your system Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a telephone ring in a noisy area such as a factory Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a telephone ring in a quiet area such as a library Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a telephone without lifting the handset Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations Overview 9 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system telephones and single line telephones For example an amplified handset is available for all PARTNER phones for hard of hearing users In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when telephones or other devices such as a doorphone are installed in a location other than the building where the control unit
316. lash use the system Recall feature instead Handling Calls 6 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m On a system telephone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up Then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a single line telephone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up Then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring m Totransfer calls to an extension with a single touch you can program the extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing m To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button m While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears Music On Hold while the call is being transferred to the destination extension If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence m The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to
317. ld Volume 9 30 Mute 6 8 N Name Display 8 23 name display 5 4 Night Service auxiliary equipment 9 30 programming 7 16 Night Service Button 7 15 using 7 16 Night Service Button 503 light patterns 6 7 Night Service Group Extensions 4 34 No Ring 7 1 Notify See Manual Signaling Number of Lines 3 10 Number of Lines 104 3 10 O Off Premises Range Extender OPRE 9 2 One touch Transfer see Auto Dial Numbers operating mode changing 4 41 operator answering calls backup 7 2 Automatic System Answer Button 7 4 Automatic System Answer Delay 7 5 Automatic System Answer Lines 7 6 Automatic System Answer Mode 7 7 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 7 8 backup answering options 7 2 button programming 7 2 call handling options 7 1 Direct Extension Dial Button 7 11 Direct Extension Dial Delay 7 13 Night Service Button 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 7 17 Station Unlock 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 7 20 Optional Equipment 1 12 4 1 9 1 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 4 23 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 7 17 using 7 18 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 light patterns 6 7 Out of building Extension Requirements 9 2 Outside Auto Dial Numbers 8 6 IN 7 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use Outside Call making an 6 16 Outside Conference Denial 4 41 Outside Conference Denial 109 4 41 Outward Restriction see Outgoing Call Restriction 401 P
318. lephone upside down Installing the Cover 2 18 Installation 2 Route the telephone cord through the hole in the top center of the stand see Figure 2 22 3 Insert the tabs on the narrow end of the stand into the slots on the inside bottom edge of the telephone see Figure 2 24 Figure 2 23 Inserting the Tabs Installing Telephones 2 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use While pressing in the tabs that protrude from the wide end of the stand lower the stand to the telephone see Figure 2 24 Release the tabs to lock the stand into one of the three positions provided by the openings in the back of the telephone The height of the stand is adjustable to three positions low medium and high The telephone height can be adjusted by moving the locking tabs to a different position Turn the telephone over Remove the plastic cover from the telephone see Figure 2 25 Label the button sheet to show any programmed lines or button features then place the button sheet on the telephone so the holes fit over the buttons Carefully replace the plastic cover Adjust the swivel display to the desired angle low medium or high Installing Telephones 2 20 Figure 2 24 Lowering the Stand to the Telephone Figure 2 25 Removing the Plastic Cover Wall Mounting Inst
319. line 6 11 dial tones 6 8 display 6 2 6 13 fixed buttons 6 3 handset 6 8 installation 2 18 microphone 6 8 other problems 11 10 plastic cover 2 20 problems IN 11 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use calls answered automatically 11 13 can t hear called party 11 13 dead telephones 11 25 Recall disconnects call 11 14 Recall has no effect 11 14 star codes 11 14 trouble making outside calls 11 10 trouble making outside calls from pool buttons 11 11 ringing patterns 6 7 ringing patterns single line 6 10 single line 1 12 6 10 limitations 6 11 speaker 6 8 testing 2 23 telephones see Feature Telephones Single Line Telephones and System Telephones testing lines 2 17 testing telephones 2 23 time setting 3 7 Time System 103 3 9 Tip Ring Device Requirements 9 2 tip ring devices connecting to system telephones 9 3 problems 11 16 call records wrap on SMDR 11 16 device does not answer 11 16 device does not dial properly 11 16 problems with 9 4 Toll Call Prefix 4 54 Toll Call Prefix 402 4 54 Touch Tone Enable 8 61 programming feature on a button 8 62 programming function in phone number B 1 using 8 62 Transfer calls to fax machines 9 15 manual 9 15 number of return rings 4 56 on a System Telephone 6 26 returned calls 4 55 Ring on Transfer 4 48 to voice mailbox 8 66 transfer transferring calls 6 25 Transfer Button 6 25 Transfer Return Display Message 6 2
320. list of valid account codes this ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls a Call Waiting 316 to identify tip ring telephone extensions that can receive the system not the local telephone company call waiting tone for a second incoming call when active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines Disallowed Allowed List features Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 to place the extension in any of these groups See Groups of Extensions on page 4 30 for more information m Fax Machine Extensions 601 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 AA Extensions 607 External Hotline 311 or Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types Copy Settings 399 Set up your system by programming one e
321. ller blocked transmission of Caller ID information A No Number message displays if no information was received You have several options at the Telephone Number Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Telephone Number Display of the previous log record m Press the Dial button to dial the telephone number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the callers name At the Name Display shown in Figure 8 3 the callers name is shown If the callers name is not available one of the following messages displays m An Out of Area message appears if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID m A Privacy message appears if the caller blocked transmission of Caller ID information m A No Name message appears if no information was received James Jones Next Prev Dial More Figure 8 3 Caller ID Name Display You have several options at the Name Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Name Display of the previous log record m Press the Dial button to dial the telephone number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the Call Status display
322. lock your extension whenever you leave your desk for an extended period of time Considerations m Station Lock is available only on system and single line touch tone telephones m You can program a Station Lock button on a system telephone Use a button with lights so you can quickly determine whether or not the extension is locked m You can enter a different code each time you lock your extension m A user ata locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive intercom and outside calls m All outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List are restricted from locked extensions m f you forget the code use Station Unlock to unlock the extension Do not lock External Hotline extensions m Station Lock returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset was used m You cannot use the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature when your extension is locked m For security purposes use Station Lock to prevent misuse of Call Screening F25 Station Lock F21 8 58 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Station Lock button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Station Lock on a System Telephone To lock an extension when the telephone is idle or while active on an intercom or outside call 1 Pr
323. lowing m Press 00 m Press Feature 2 0 and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature 2 0 the number of the originating extension and the number of the covering extension 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Call Coverage at a System Telephone To send calls for coverage manually 1 Press Feature 2 0 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage manually 1 Press Feature D 2 Dial your extension number twice To send calls for coverage by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button Ifan originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no covering extension was programmed dial the extension number of the covering extension Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Coverage by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button Ifan originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number Call Cover
324. ls do the following Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Remain on the line and explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up System Speed Dial 4 53 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code Programming To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 0 at extension 10 or 11 2 Select a three digit code by pressing and dialing three digits between 600 and 699 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code Blank appears 3 Enter the number For example to program 555 4757 press DOQMOO NOTE To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions precede the number by a 4 For example to mark the number 555 1001 press DAAA 4 Continue programming System Speed Dial numbers m To program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the three digit code m To remove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press Mic HFAI o
325. ls telephones Caller ID Name Display 8 25 PARTN HE A 10 ns System Reais Bete Special Characters You can add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers and Auto Dial numbers see Table B 1 Table B 1 Special Characters Function Button Display Description Pause P Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Recall R Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number Stop S Stops the dialing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press the Auto Dial button or and the two or three digit Speed Dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an MLC 6 or a TransTalk 9000 series phone since it has no button Touch Tone T Sends touch tones over a rotary line to electronic equipment Enable such as answering machines and bank computers Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually Examples m Pause To call an answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial to retrieve messages enter SAAMAA ola Hol
326. lsewhere in this chapter The procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings provided that the system batteries are installed and not low on power Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control unit s power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Problems with System 11 26 Cross Reference of Features Tables A 1 A 2 and A 3 show the feature codes you can dial to program those features Table A 1 System Programming Procedures Code Feature Code Feature 101 System Date 314 Pool Extension Assignment 102 System Day 315 Pool Access Restriction 103 System Time 316 Call Waiting 104 Number of Lines 317 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 105 Transfer Return Rings 318 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 107 Recall Timer Duration 319 Caller ID Log All Calls 108 Rotary Dialing Timeout 320 Call Coverage Rings 109 Outside Conference Denial 321 VMS Cover Rings 110 Automatic System Answer Delay 399 Copy Settings 111 Automatic System Answer Button 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 112 Direct Extension Dial Delay 402 Toll Call Prefix 113 Direct Extension Dial Button 403 System Password 114 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 404 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 115 Wake Up Service Button 405 Disallowed List Assignments 116 Call Coverag
327. m Green means you are using the line m Red means someone at another extension is using the line Line is idle A call is ringing on the line m Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension m Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected ina conference call Also for Call Screening and Record a Call A call on the line is either on hold or parked m Green wink means the call is on hold or parked at your extension m Red wink means the call is on hold or parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call System Telephones 6 6 Green means feature is on Feature is off A user is entering a four digit code to lock or unlock his or her extension Call Screening and Record a Call Green wink means the call is either on hold or parked at your extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Red means the extension programmed on the button is busy Extension programmed on the button is idle Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you Using the Telephones Table 6 2 Light Patterns on System Telephones Continued Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Button Green
328. m Restore 0 0 0c cence eee System Problems scrret daneri trenbi egi Parks ba as a oie et Other Problems with System 00 0 cece eee Cross Reference of Features Special Characters EXampl s 2 cotos ts ck ee NaS Se te ee Sat mee i 8 he Be Moe Ame Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form 0 0 eee eee eee Programming Mixed Telephone Types OVeENMICW 4 22 pee See Oe ON a EA et Cd ak A E eae 8 Deedes Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use vi Master TOC Structure ofthe Book c itocapiesimiesiabewte began basia bis ban takes nike 1 2 ECAUTES aa ae aude Sa te hee ahh eee ae Aa teak gs aly eG Mone neater tional 1 3 a Features Available with Release 2 0 or Later 0 000 1 3 a Features Available with Release 3 0 or Later 0 0 0 1 3 Modes of Operation caia E OA a 1 4 Key Moderatto ia e dl ed E 1 4 a Hybrid Mode cu sais di iaa ml br iv a eR COR id ca apta E 1 5 Syst m Capaony asco bro aida 1 6 System Components ci E A Es 1 7 a Configurations g eskean ta Oscar ds ad ii Az 1 7 a System Modules 002 de a A a E eee AY 1 9 a System Batteries etnia eta patata oda pa Be 1 10 s PO Gard Slots cebra Dro geist at a E Seas a a Ea he BS ee ees aa 1 10 a TelephOneS cra wae POs eee eee AA 1 11 DA 3 04 A 1 12 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use
329. m and telephone programming settings revert to the factory settings You are no longer in System Programming mode Try the restore again Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 Use this feature to define the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension In Release 2 0 of the system when you program Call Coverage Rings 116 it applies to all system extensions programmed for Call Coverage In systems of Release 3 0 or later you can program Call Coverage Rings 320 on an individual extension basis Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 4 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Programming For Call Coverage Rings 116 Release 2 0 only To change the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension i Pp N Press Feature 0 0
330. matic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for single line telephones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted This feature can provide the Privacy F07 function for single line telephones Abbreviated Ringing 305 4 2 Programming System Options Considerations If you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine a voice messaging system or an auto attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension Single line telephones and system telephones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active Automatic Extension Privacy applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used If the voice messaging system extension does not have Automatic Extension Privacy turned on other users can bridge onto the call If a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system causing it to disconnect from the call This causes the screening exten
331. matically dial the caller s number SMDR Talk Time to allow you to track on an SMDR call report the length of time that users talk on incoming outside calls Features Available with Release 3 0 or Later Call Screening to listen to a caller leaving a message in the user s mailbox mu Fax Calling Tone Detection to automatically route incoming fax calls to a fax machine m Record a Call to record an active conversation in the user s mailbox PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System PMVS 5 0 or later is required Unique Line Ringing for a user to differentiate which line is ringing m Enhanced programmable features Call Coverage Rings VMS Cover Rings VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule a Automatic Daylight Savings Time to change the time one hour as Daylight Savings Time begins and ends m 911 Calls do not require account code entry Features 1 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m PARTNER Remote Access PC Card allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions NOTE You must have additional PARTNER Remote PC Software to program the system from a PC Modes of Operation The system supports two modes of operation The mode of operation determines how users access outside lines from their telephones m Key Mode You access individual outside lines to make and receive calls m Hybrid Mode For Release 2 0 or
332. may apply Outside the continental U S contact your local Authorized Dealer Overview 11 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you call have the following information ready so that the representative can better help you m The kind of system you have for example PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 To determine the release number press Feature 5 9 at any display telephone m The number of lines and extensions in your system m The type of telephone system or single line and the model number if applicable System telephone model numbers are located either on the upper right hand corner of the telephone or on the dialpad overlay m If you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did System Release Status F59 When calling for customer support you need to know the release level of your system This feature enables you to determine that information at any system display telephone A display similar to the following appears P ACS R2 0 C01 This message indicates that this is Release 2 0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System The C01 represents the country code To use this feature press Feature at any system display telephone The system release message replaces the default information on the top line of the telephone display for 15 seconds Power Failure Operation When power to the sy
333. means that every outside line in the system is associated with a specific line button at extension 10 All other extensions can be set up with access to only lines only pools or a combination of lines and pools m Those extensions that have pool buttons even if they also have individual line buttons are called pooled extensions m Those extensions that have only line buttons including extension 10 are called key extensions Key extensions cannot access pools If your system is configured for Hybrid mode keep in mind m Aline can be assigned to only one pool m Individual extensions can be restricted access to specific pools m Individual lines can be assigned to an extension with pool buttons as long as the lines are not part of any pool Modes of Operation 1 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use At installation the system assigns all outside lines to the main pool and assigns the main pool to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of all system telephones except extension 10 If desired you can remove some of the lines from the main pool and create auxiliary pools Then you can assign pools and or individual lines on a per extension basis System Capacity The PARTNER ACS release you have the carrier you use and the combination of modules installed determine the number of available lines and extensions m PARTNER ACS Release 1 0 and 1 1 systems allow up to 15 lines and up
334. message in your mailbox You can turn the message light on or off by using Message Light On or Message Light Off respectively The XX in the code represents the extension number Considerations For message waiting capability single line telephones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a processor module a 308EC module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns on off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been received deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m You can use Message Light On with a doorphone for example the doorphone s light flashes as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a processor module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to turn the light off You can program a Message Light On or a Message Light Off button on a system telephone to turn the message light on or off at a specific extension with one touch On a single line telephone the message light flashes only when the telephone is idle to indicate that
335. ming 3 6 Initial System Programming Press again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM Press Central Tel Program A display similar to the following appears CENTRAL TELEPHONE PROG Extension Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned show the current Line Ringing settings The remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features At this point program the features that must use Centralized Telephone Programming To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number To exit programming mode you can press Feature Q or lift the handset and place it back in the cradle Setting the Date Day and Time After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures to set the system clock m System Date 101 to set the month day and year m System Day 102 to set the day of the week for Release 2 0 and earlier systems m System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes m Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 to automatically update the system clock NOTE Turn this feature off if you live in an area without daylight savings time Considerations Backup Programming Automatic 123 uses the System Date and System Time to schedule the automatic backups Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming
336. mming the System Administrator must do to get the system up and running This chapter also explains how to use System Programming and Telephone Programming Chapter 4 Programming System Options describes the programming of system features that the System Administrator can do Chapter 5 Initial Telephone Programming explains the telephone programming required of the System Administrator Chapter 6 Using the Telephones explains for the user and the System Administrator how to use the system telephones and single line telephones including the handling of calls Chapter 7 Operator Features explains the programming and use of features specific to the operator positions at extensions 10 and 11 This chapter is intended for the System Administrator and the operators Chapter 8 Programming Telephone Features describes the programming and use of features available to any user on the system Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment intended primarily for technicians and the System Administrator describes typical equipment that is supported by the PARTNER ACS including voice messaging systems Chapter 10 Upgrading the System explains how the system software and hardware can be upgraded as new modules and releases become available This chapter is intended for technicians and the System Administrator Chapter 11 Troubleshooting intended for both technicians and the System Administrator describes possible problems with the system
337. move pools from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them m You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change an extension from a pooled extension to a key extension m When you use Unique Line Ringing 209 incoming calls that ring at a pool button ring with the pattern assigned to that line You can assign individual ring patterns to lines within a pool Programming To assign pools to a pooled extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 4 Enter the system extension number to be programmed There is a steady red light next to each button that has a line assigned and a flashing red light next to each button that has a pool assigned To remove all existing pool assignments press before selecting a pool Enter the desired pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 For example to select pool 881 press A Do one of the following m If you want to assign the pool to the first available button with lights press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 1 Assigned m If you want to remove a pool assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 2 Not Assigned m For auxiliary pools only if you want to assign the pool to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 3 Select a Button The
338. n all lines in that pool the factory setting Y m 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on lines in that pool 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on lines in that pool m 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can receive transferred calls on lines in that pool Do one of the following To restrict another pool at this extension press Next Item or Prev item until the pool number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Extension Assignment 314 Use this feature to identify the pools that are assigned to buttons at a pooled extension The system uses two buttons to represent the main pool 880 and one for each auxiliary pool 881 882 883 You can assign up to five pool buttons per extension Considerations You cannot assign pool buttons to extension 10 or to any key extension The main pool buttons are always assigned to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of a system telephone You cannot use Select Button Setting 3 for the main pool 880 If you select Not Assigned Setting 2 for the main pool 880 during Pool Extension Assignment programming the main pool is removed from the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of the system telephone at that extension The buttons are then available for pr
339. n extension number baal Then Line Ringing Press each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display Immediate ring green steady Lines e No ring green fast flutter Y Pools Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds green slow flashing Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Press a programmable button Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number Call Pickup Press a programmable button Press left O Dial the two digit extension number Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press Dial a two digit code 80 99 Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions Call Screening Press a programmable button with lights Press El E Caller ID Call Logging amp Dialing Press a programmable button with lights Press Auto Dial Numbers Outside and Inside Press a programmable button To program an outside number Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions To program an extension number Press left Dial the extension number to ring the extension or plus the extension number to voice signal the extension Caller ID Inspect Press a programmable button with lights Press Calle
340. n for the doorphone extension will be automatically set to select intercom lines first m You can use Message Light On with the doorphone for example the doorphone s light flashes as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a processor module or to a Release 3 0 or later 206 module Programming To program a doorphone extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OOA for doorphone 1 or A000 for doorphone 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the doorphone two digit extension number or press to unassign an existing doorphone extension 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Fax Machines You can set up fax machines in several ways to work with your system This section includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system telephone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single touch and for transferring calls to the fax machine extension To use fax machines on the system you must program lines for fax calling tone CNG detection as desired and identify the extensions that have fax machines Fax Machines 9 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment Preventing Inappropriate Fax Answering When lines appear on a fax extension you want to make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this m Set the
341. n hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Joining Calls Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join a call on an outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Considerations m You cannot join a call by pressing a pool button m You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension m You cannot join a call on an extension that has a Voice Interrupt On Busy call in progress m You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller m You cannot put a joined call on hold Handling Calls 6 28 Using the Telephones m You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line or pool button change to alternately flashing red and green m Ifa system telephone joins a call on a single line telephone there is a momentary break in the call on the single line telephone m You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent
342. n press a button with lights to assign the auxiliary pool to that button If you use option 3 after an auxiliary pool has been assigned the auxiliary pool moves from the old button to the new button you select Pool Programming 4 44 5 6 Programming System Options Do one of the following m To assign another pool for this extension press Next item or Prev item until the pool access code appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Line Assignment 207 Use this feature to assign lines to or remove lines from the main and auxiliary pools supported for Hybrid mode You can change line assignments in the main pool 880 or in any of three auxiliary pools 881 882 or 883 Considerations You can assign some or all outside lines to a specific pool but you cannot assign a specific outside line to more than one pool m Because users cannot control which line they get when they access a pool you should group lines with similar purposes WATS lines FX lines lines designated for a particular set of users together in a unique pool m f you have individual lines assigned to a pooled extension and you use this feature to change pool line assignment do not press Next Data or Prev Data to specify a pool assignment If you do the system removes that l
343. n this feature off if you live in an area without daylight savings time Programming To change the status of Automatic Daylight Standard Time 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQA at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active the factory setting w m 2 Not Active the factory setting for Hong Kong Release 3 0 only Setting the Date Day and Time 3 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Assigning Lines Use the feature Number of Lines 104 to determine in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions or to determine in Hybrid mode the number of lines assigned to the main pool After you use the Number of Lines feature you can use other features to refine the assignment of lines Line assignment is also based upon whether an extension is a Key or Pooled extension Refine the line assignment accordingly after you use the Number of Lines feature Number of Lines 104 Use this feature to determine in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions In Hybrid mode use this feature to determine the number of lines assigned to the main pool This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit This feature should be used only for i
344. n tip ring telephones ZN security ALERT Use Station Lock F21 to prevent misuse of this feature If Station Lock is activated Call Screening does not work You must program Call Screening on a line button with LEDs by using Centralized Telephone Programming Once the button is programmed the user can turn the feature on by pressing the button Calls are now screened until the user turns the feature off by pressing the button again When the feature is on Call Screening begins once the voice mail system has answered the call While the call is being screened the user is connected to the call in a listen only mode on the speakerphone The user can hear both the outgoing announcement and the incoming caller leaving the message One call can be screened at a time at an extension If more than one call is ringing the system uses the ringing line order procedure to determine which of the eligible calls to screen Once Call Screening begins the user can m Answer the screened call by going off hook on the handset This causes voice mail to drop off the call m Turn the feature off by pressing the call screening button again The telephone drops off the call but the voice mail system does not drop off the call m Answer or place another call This causes the telephone to drop off the call A green steady LED for the button indicates that Call Screening is on but not currently screening any calls While a call is being screened the butt
345. naled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system telephone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Group Pickup 166G Use this feature to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group you can answer the call at any extension without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Group Pickup I66G 8 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system telephone to pick up calls in a Pickup Group with one touch Programming To program a
346. nce 5 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode Toll Call Prefix 402 Use this feature to indicate whether users must dial a O or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number this feature is not available for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version Set Toll Call Prefix to reflect the dialing patterns of your local telephone company Considerations This feature affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions Toll Call Prefix 402 4 54 Programming System Options Programming To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 2 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value appears 1 0Oor1 required before Area Code and Number the factory setting w m 2 Area Code and Number Only Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Programming By the factory setting transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered However you can program the transferred call to return to another extension And you also can program the number of time a transferred call rings before it returns to an extension Program the following features for Transfer Return Transfer Return Extension Transfer Return Rings Transfer Return Extension 306 Use this feature to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a cal
347. nd Use Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 WO To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value appears The number of rings can be from 0 to 9 with O meaning immediate answering of the call The factory setting is 2 rings Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Use this feature to identify the lines on which incoming calls should be answered by Automatic System Answer Considerations m Alllines programmed with Automatic System Answer should be assigned to extension 10 Only outside calls on Automatic System Answer lines are answered automatically Intercom transferred and transfer return calls are not answered automatically m You can set Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 to Active to log calls on lines answered by Automatic System Answer Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered by the system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 Q 4 Enter the two digit system line number of the desired line To assign or unassign the line press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w To identify another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number appears on t
348. nd place your other hand on the top of the cover and gently pull the cover up and away from the carrier Be careful not to break the tabs that attach the cover to the carrier Z caution Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade 4 Insert the PC Card in either PC Card slot on the processor module see Figure 10 2 When inserted properly the PC Card projects about 1 5 8 inch 4 cm from the module Using a PC Card 10 2 Upgrading the System Figure 10 2 Inserting the PC Card 5 Power up the system a Reconnect the power cord AN caution The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case b If you have a 5 slot carrier move the carrier s On Off switch to the On position While the system upgrades the LED on the processor module flashes green and red alternately When the upgrade has finished in about 20 seconds the LED becomes steady green 6 Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit a fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide 7
349. ne fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 a f Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code m If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering telephone numbers in a list you must press Next Procedure Prev Procedure since entering and a three digit code is considered part of the telephone number Programming To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers _ oa F oO DN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QO at extension 10 or 11 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following m To add other telephone numbers to this list press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2
350. ne 2 you simply press the line button labeled Line 2 Key mode also lets you monitor call activity by using the lights next to the line button anyone with a line assigned to his or her extension can tell when an incoming call is ringing on that line when a call on that line is on hold and when that line is in use At installation the system assigns outside lines to the buttons on all system telephones from left to right starting with the bottom row of buttons On an extension basis you can change which lines are assigned and which buttons are used to select the lines if desired All extensions in a system configured for Key mode are referred to as key extensions Modes of Operation 1 4 Overview Hybrid Mode Hybrid mode offers you flexibility in accessing outside lines from your telephone As in Key mode individual lines can be assigned to system extensions Additionally multiple outside lines can be grouped together in pools The system can have up to four pools including a main pool and three auxiliary pools Each pool is identified by a pool access code 880 881 882 and 883 respectively Pools are represented on system telephones by pool buttons Unlike line buttons pool buttons give you access to multiple lines from a single button Each auxiliary pool is associated with only one pool button Since the main pool typically contains most of your company s outside lines it is associated with two pool buttons This
351. nected immediately after the system answers depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 m You must record the Automatic System Answer message from the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 m You cannot record or play a message while Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed m The message must be at least eight seconds to use the Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 feature The system takes seven seconds to determine if the incoming call is a fax m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Programming To record an Automatic System Answer message 1 As needed install the Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions 2 Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press intercom Dial OQ The current time of day remains on the second line
352. nes and Extensions 0000 cece tee e ee 2 16 Installing the COVER sorod fie dy ee hte eet ok eed tee wit eee hyde et pees ea Be 2 18 Installing TelephOnes s asia kancctwed inr eats ands Pane we se rae ke we 2 18 Connecting Auxiliary Equipment 00000 eee 2 25 3 Initial System Programming COVEIVIOW 2644 dol a a ld a a a DA 3 1 System Programming BasSiCS au depa 3 1 Using System Programming ves ns als e A aa 3 2 Using Centralized Telephone Programming ooocccccco eee eee 3 6 Setting the Date Day and Time 0 2 0 eee 3 7 Assigning LINES eena ds ca oda dis eA aOREM AS Ge TE ad a ee 3 10 Customizing Extensions arroba 3 12 Emergency Phone Number List 406 auauua 3 15 4 Programming System Options OVEINIEW 2 ccs eno E a a See eae De ew He tan een 46 4 1 Abbreviated Ringing 305 0 0 ec tee 4 2 Automatic Extension Privacy 804 0000 cece 4 2 Master TOC i PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Backup and Restore 0 0 0 tet tee e ees 4 3 Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 anaana anaana 4 7 Caller ID Programmin vs mirror 4 8 Call Waiting 316 chess cae ca A noes ar are RM Sou aeehaane acne ae 4 14 Copy Settings 399 rua aa Patios oie ee dar at 4 15 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 0 000 e eee eee 4 16 Dial M de 201 se ri 3 44 drid tbls acess Boe een bk Be 4 24 Display Language 303
353. ness while the telephone is idle Date day and time when the telephone is idle Number dialed when placing a call Extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you Duration while a call is in progress During programming the settings options and prompts and the handset is in the cradle Line Programmable Buttons Used for individual outside lines or if no line is assigned on a button for programming telephone or extension numbers or system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a number feature is programmed press the button to dial the number or use the feature The PARTNER 34D has 36 programmable buttons 32 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18D has 20 programmable buttons 16 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18 has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the PARTNER 6 has 4 programmable buttons all with lights System Telephones 6 2 Using the Telephones m Fixed Buttons In addition to the line buttons the telephones have some or all of the following fixed buttons which are already imprinted Intercom Buttons Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension in the system Feature Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Conference Press to add other parties to your call
354. ng Ring Page on a Single Line Telephone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Doone of the following m To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring m To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 8 36 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G Use this feature to distribute call volume among extensions in a group to off load call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where G is a Hunt Group number from 1 8 the system rings or voice signals the first available extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available exte
355. ng Call Waiting see Answering Calls on page 6 19 m Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls Programming To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 3 1 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign Call Waiting press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting Y To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Call Waiting 316 4 14 Programming System Options Copy Settings 399 Set up your system by programming one extension for each type of telephone in the system Then use Copy Settings 399 to program other telephones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D telephone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 telephones Use this feature to copy all of the following settings from one extension to another m 116 Call Coverage Rings Release 317 Caller ID Call Logging and 2 0 only Dialing Release 2 0 and later m 117 VMS Cover Rings Release 2 0 m 318 Caller ID Log Answered Calls on m 320 Call Coverage Rings Release m 301 Line Assignment 3 0 and later m 302 Line Access Restriction m 321 VMS Cover Rin
356. ng and Dialing Logging Center ID Calls see Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 loss of power 11 2 Loudspeaker Paging 8 44 using single line telephone 8 45 system telephone 8 45 loudspeaker paging system paging system 9 24 M making acall 6 15 Manual Backup problems 11 19 Manual Signaling 8 41 using 8 42 Manual Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines 9 15 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers 4 53 marked System Speed Dial numbers 4 53 message light turning on and off 8 43 Message Light Off 8 43 using single line telephone 8 44 system telephone 8 44 Message Light On 8 43 Message Waiting see Standard Phones messages leaving A 6 monitoring A 9 receiving A 6 Microphone 6 7 microphone 6 8 Microphone Mic Button 6 7 mixed telephone types D 1 Mode of Operation 4 41 mode of operation changing 4 41 Modems send and receive 9 27 send only 9 24 modems 9 25 send and receive 9 27 sending only 9 25 Modes of operation 1 4 Modules description 1 9 PARTNER ACS processor 1 7 1 9 processor 1 9 modules adding new modules 10 4 LEDs 2 15 replacing 10 6 5 slot carrier configuration 10 9 stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 10 6 Monitoring Call Activity 7 2 8 5 Music On Hold 602 as background music 9 29 Index description 9 29 programming 9 30 volume setting system wide 9 30 Music On Hold Volume 614 9 30 Music On Hold 9 28 9 29 connecting audio source 9 28 Music On Ho
357. nging back at your extension ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP Release 3 0 or later see Unique Line Ringing 209 on page 4 57 NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to telephones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead System Telephones 6 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Tones There are two different dial tones when you call with a system telephone Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system telephone press a line or pool button The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press hiercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone Every PARTNER and MLS system telephone except the MLS 6 telephone has a speaker and a microphone which you can turn on by pressing Gpkr In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing Mis Ara When the green light next to Wic HF4 is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset you can use the sp
358. nitial system setup Z caution Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup Considerations m You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit If you do not use this feature the line numbers associated with empty jacks are assigned to telephones as though there were actually lines connected m You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions m To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 m In Hybrid mode do not use this feature to add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes the following features for existing pools back to factory settings Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing Assigning Lines 3 10 Initial System Programming In Hybrid and Key mode do not use this feature to add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes the following features for individual lines back to factory settings
359. nly dials outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 or a pool access code and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 Set the auto answer feature of the modem to Off Modems 9 26 Using Auxiliary Equipment Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem use the setup shown in Figure 9 13 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy Figure 9 13 Send and Receive Modem Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the ast line selected by other extensions so the modem line is available for the modem unless all lines in the system are being used To Program To program for a send and receive modem 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one o
360. nments 408 000 cee eee 4 18 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 00 00 4 18 Disallowed List Assignments 405 0 00 00 cee eee 4 21 Line Access Restriction 302 0 0c cece ee 4 21 a Outgoing Call Restriction 401 2 0 2 0 eee 4 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Mode 201 sc noni er tar nee p SR oy wee DEE a Considerations ss ren aE EREA Hoven yesh sear ete biel aac ee tee oa Secon fete AG tert ila ot Coote AAR A RS a ee AR ie Sabie a ttt Aes Display Language 303 00022c2as2twasvawen sewed de oe a Considerations Set ts id SOA oe Oe ga la foes bo a PrOGraMMING os cuan fees tae i dees bar Se bars etd Se Distinctive Ring 808 0 0 a dana e n ea a a e EE eee PODA MM a eo a a o o a E External Hotline 3811 crien tenen p n E Aa V E E E E A E E E EE Programming A n eee sE ale Dales a aa a Baa wee En Forced Account Codes gt siciwi Sse aana A A E a Forced Account Code Entry 307 oia id e Forced Account Code List 409 0 ccc eee Groups Of EXTENSIONS e obea ra ate a A Calling Group Extensions 502 0 000 tenes Hunt Group Extensions 505 000 ccc eee eens s Group Call Distribution 206 00 5 cacon de a bo ewe a eee wake da hy a aci Night Service Group Extensions 504 0 0 00 e eee eee a Pickup Group Extensions 501 icici ene bi ethan oe ee ee
361. nnecting the Contact Closure Adjunct Follow these steps to connect the Contact Closure Adjunct see Figure 9 6 1 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Insert the modular plug into the Contact Closure jack the first jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module Connect the other end of the cord to the jack in the Contact Closure Adjunct Have a qualified electrician wire the Contact Closure device or devices such as an electronic lock or alert to the wiring receptacles in the other end of the Contact Closure Adjunct See the information shipped with the Contact Closure Adjunct for wiring instructions Contact Closure Adjunct 9 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Contact Closure Jack lias AAA O AAVV Contact Closure Adjunct Figure 9 6 Connecting the Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Group 612 Use this feature to specify which system extensions can activate each Contact Closure Before a user can activate a contact closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Considerations m If a Contact Closure is used to control a door lock and a doorphone is installed at that door you may want to assign the extensions in the Contact Clo
362. nother extension or exit programming mode Using Record a Call To activate the feature press the programmed feature button when active on an intercom or CO call The green LED at the feature button is turned on steady to indicate that feature activation has been initiated When PMVS connects the LEDs become an alternating red and green flash Any one of the following deactivates Record a Call m You press the Record a Call button again m You hang up the call PMVS drops the call because the recording time limit was exceeded Call recording terminates because silence was detected on the line for 15 seconds Redialing Features Use the following features to redial telephone numbers m Last Number Redial m Save Number Redial Last Number Redial F05 Use this feature to redial the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits Last Number Redial is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Redialing Features 8 51 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Last Number Redial redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes m You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system telephone to redial a number with one touch m You can use Save Number Redial F04 to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls bef
363. nother procedure or exit programming mode For VMS Cover Rings 321 To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QAC at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe extension prompt enter an extension number The Cover Rings prompt appears VMS Cover Rings XX 3 Rings Enter a setting 1 9 3 is the factory setting or press until the correct value appears To set VMS Cover Rings for another extension press Next tem or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Delay 506 Use this feature to determine when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant of the voice messaging system You can set the system for any number of rings 0 6 Assigning more rings gives the operator an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant For systems of Release 3 0 or later VMS Hunt Delay is programmable on a per line basis In addition you can program this feature so that calls can be handled one way during the day and a different way when the system is in Night Service Considerations m If you do not subscribe to ICLID services and want immediate call handling set this option to O rings m If you do subscribe to ICLID services and want immediate call handling set this option to at least
364. nother specified extension m Use this feature to retrieve a parked call If you use Call Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls you are connected to the parked call parked calls take precedence over ringing calls Programming To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button 3 To specify the extension to be answered press left intercom followed by 6 and the two digit system extension number For example to answer a call ringing at extension 23 press left mAB Call Pickup I6XX 8 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Call Pickup on a System Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press intercom 6 and the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Using Call Pickup on a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial plus the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Call Pickup I6XX 8 16 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later Call Screening allows you to listen to a caller leaving a message in your mailbox This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system and an MLS or PARTNER system telephone This feature is not available o
365. ns Display Language 303 specifies the language used for display messages The call report header is printed in the same language as that specified for extension 10 System Date 101 and System Time 103 set correctly to ensure accurate call reports If a report cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system stores up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls are not recorded Before including the Talk field on call reports or changing the output format to 24 digits check the documentation shipped with the call accounting device to verify that these options are supported If SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits In the event of a power failure records of any calls in progress are lost Inside intercom calls are not recorded If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means two records are generated on the report Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 32 Using Auxilia
366. ns and Permissions 4 16 Programming System Options You can create up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each An Allowed Phone Number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 and the wildcard character displayed as Considerations For specific telephone numbers enter the number exactly as you would dial it To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 800 or 1800 After programming the Allowed Phone Number Lists you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Number Lists override Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 but not Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction 315 or Night Service Button 503 with a System Password 403 The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial calls is required when users make long distance calls If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering telephone number
367. ns the extensions associated with the voice messaging system At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 8 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call is not forwarded If the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off An extension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is set to No Restriction or In Only If an extension in a Hunt Group activat
368. nsion and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For a voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax machines Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system and the auto attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy m If only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed amount of transfer return rings m You can program a Group Hunting button on a system telephone to ring or voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch m If you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 htercom MM ona button to retrieve messages with one touch m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hun
369. nsion X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button To Program Fax 2 Receive Ext Y To program the receive fax machine 1 Do one of the following m f extension Y is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y m f extension Y is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension Y If you want to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring set all other lines and pools at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring Fax Machines 9 20 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using t
370. nsion that has multiple lines alerting is for the line that rang first Once the call is answered the extension begins ringing by using the pattern associated with the next alerting line for that extension m Incoming calls that are ringing at a pool button ring with the pattern assigned to the line Lines within a pool may be assigned individual ring patterns Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AAO at extension 10 or 11 2 At the line prompt enter the number of the line to be programmed with the pattern 3 At the pattern prompt enter a ringing pattern number 1 8 1 is the factory setting or press until the desired value appears The display looks like this RING PATTERN LXX PATTERN X 4 To set the ring pattern for another line press Next Item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Use this feature to identify extensions that can receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call When Voice Interrupt On Busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably can hear both the beeps and
371. nt Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List without entering an account code Users can make 911 999 for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 only calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 999 for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 only has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List Programming To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 6 at extension 10 or 11 Emergency Phone Number List 406 3 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Select a list entry 01 10 A display similar to the following appears Emergency List 03 D ta 222 202 Enter the telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter Do one of the following m To enter other telephone numbers press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Emergency Phone Number List 406 3 16 Programming System Options 4 Contents VS asc G cee E BG atk Rae ens gail ee es ity Sa oad 4 1 Abbreviated Ringing 805 0 0 0 ees 4 2 a Considerations sa at aou via cs eas IA Aa 4 2 e Programming e Ga see aah Cece CaN a
372. ntinues until the call is answered m Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups m If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ring in the group See Auto Attendant on page 9 7 for more information m If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options Automated Attendant Service or calls routed directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user See Voice Messaging Systems on page 9 39 for more information Examples Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution and Hunt Groups m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group This lets outside callers ring the group directly without being transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order a Ifyou install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system to Hunt Group 7 Then assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a speci
373. nts 1 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table 1 3 Line Extension Modules Continued Name Line Jacks Extension Jacks Additional Information 308EC 3 8 Supported in Release 2 0 and later systems You Expansion can connect telephones and other devices such Module as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Green power indicator Supports Caller ID 1 To receive Caller ID information you must first subscribe to the service from your local telephone company if available on a per line basis Then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the module Any users with system display telephones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID information Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E 206EC and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E 400EC and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Any 200 modules can be used System Batteries The system uses two user replaceable AAA size standard alkaline batteries in the processor module to ensure that system programming and telephone programming settings are not lost in case of a power failure PC Card Slots The processor module has two PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association interface slots hereafter referred to as PC Card slots You can buy
374. number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press EDDA m To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star 4 before the telephone number Marked System Speed Dial numbers appear on the SMDR call report as nnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code The digits in a Marked Speed Dial Number do not appear on displays m A Marked System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press PHAPA m You cannot program System Speed Dial codes on Auto Dial buttons m You can program System Speed Dial numbers only from extension 10 or 11 but you can use them from any extension m Use a completed System Speed Dial form to program the list of numbers After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See Appendix C for a blank form m Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system m If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test cal
375. number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 8 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To remove Call Forwarding 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press ANO 3 Dial your extension number twice Call Park Use this feature to park a call or place it on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any telephone in the system Considerations Call Park typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because users can retrieve calls without knowing which line the call is on m You should park only one call at a time from your extension to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up the parked call Call Park is useful for single line telephone users because they can retrieve a parked call without knowing which line the call is on m Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls m If you frequently park calls and you have a system telephone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing the button See Auto Dialing on page 8 4 m Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting Call Coverage Call Forwarding or VMS Cover Using Call Park on a System Telephone To park a call 1 While on a call press and dial your two digit extension number or press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension 2 Hang
376. o identify the lines on which incoming calls are to be answered for Direct Extension Dial Considerations m Assign all lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial to extension 10 or its transfer return extension m Ifa caller enters an invalid extension number or does not enter one at all the call is transferred to the operator at extension 10 or to the designated transfer return extension for extension 10 To intercept a call while the message is playing the red light next to the line button is on steady press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved You must program a button on the system display telephone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a factory setting To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered for Direct Extension Dial 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 0 G 2 Ent
377. ode To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when no toll prefix is required see Table 4 2 The table uses exchange 976 as the example Table 4 2 Preventing Dialing of Numbers in One Exchange When No Toll Prefix Required Entry Restriction 976 Prevents local calls 101976 Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the second digit such as 203 111976 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 m To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number OQO m To prevent the use of all star codes enter for touch tone telephones and equivalent to a 4 on rotary telephones m To prevent the use of a specific star code for example DO to block Caller ID information enter the plus the 2 or 3 digit code for touch tone telephones or equivalent to a on rotary telephones plus the 2 or 3 digit code Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use For touch tone telephones entering DOO prevents the use of HOO to block Caller ID information For rotary telephones entering DOM ML prevents the use of QOO to block Caller ID information m Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers override the Disallowed List m When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder to
378. oes not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on m If Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m If Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring Single Line Telephone Problems 11 8 Troubleshooting What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this telephone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 15 m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the telephone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Telephone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem telephone Plug in a single line telephone that you know rings properly m If the replacement telephone rings properly the problem telephone is defective Replace it m If the replacement telephone does not ring properly call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Single Line Telephone Rings Back after Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Replace the handset carefully If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possibl
379. ogging caller ID information 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Caller ID Programming 4 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use At the Line prompt enter the two digit line number to be associated with the extension Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned line is associated with an extension or the extension is associated with a line m 2 Not assigned line is not associated with an extension the factory setting Do one of the following To associate another line with this extension press Next item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 To associate another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Log All Calls 319 Release 2 0 or Later Use this feature to program a maximum of one extension to log all answered Caller ID calls and all unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines You must use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the extension that will log all calls Then use the Caller ID Log All Calls feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associ
380. oggle For example if a Contact Closure that controls a door lock has a Contact Closure Operation Type of 5 Seconds On the door lock is released for 5 seconds when a user activates the Contact Closure If the Contact Closure has a Contact Closure Operation Type of Toggle the Contact Closure must be activated and deactivated One user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure or the same user can both activate and deactivate the Contact Closure Programming To specify the Operation Type for a Contact Closure 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 6 7 at extension 10 or 11 At the Contact Number prompt enter the number 1 or 2 for the Contact Closure The display shows the current setting for that contact closure Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value appears or press to return to the default setting m 1 1 Second On m 2 3 Seconds On the factory setting Y m 3 5 Seconds On m 4 Toggle To assign the Operation Type for the other Contact Closure press Next Item or Prev item and repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Contact Closure Adjunct 9 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use c
381. ogram another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Loudspeaker Paging System Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area The system supports all Avaya Inc paging systems including the entire PagePac line The system also supports most paging systems from other manufacturers when the paging systems are connected using a paging interface device Follow these steps to connect a paging system to the processor module see Figure 9 11 NOTE If you connect a loudspeaker paging system from another manufacturer a paging interface may be required 1 Insert the modular plug into the PAGE jack on the processor module located near the middle of the processor just above the line jacks NOTE When you connect a paging system to the PAGE jack use a two pair twisted pair cable between the paging system and the processor module Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager 3 Connect the other end of the cord to the paging system Loudspeaker Paging System 9 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment E PAGE Jack 7 I Paging System optional Figure 9 11 Connecting the Paging System Modems You can use a modem to send calls only or you can use a modem to send and
382. ogramming lines auxiliary pools or system features If the main pool is ever reassigned to that extension previous programming is erased Auxiliary pool buttons are located next to the main pool buttons unless you select Setting 3 to choose a button location when programming You can assign up to four pools to a single line telephone but a single line telephone can make only one call at a time To make a call the user lifts the handset and dials 9 the system selects the first available pool based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for that extension Alternately the user can dial a pool access code to make a call by using a specific pool You should use Pool Line Assignment 207 prior to this procedure to assign lines to or remove lines from pools You can use Line Assignment 301 to assign individual outside lines to buttons on a pooled extension Pool Programming 4 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m Users must have access to an outside line or pool in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 m You can use Line Ringing to identify when each pool and individual line assigned to an extension should start ringing the factory setting for pools is No Ring and for lines is Immediate Ring m f you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 m Re
383. ol buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing When an extension is changed from Key to Pooled any previously assigned line buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Pool Line Assignment 314 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing Programming To change the Line Access Mode setting for a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 3 QG Enter the desired extension number For example to program extension 18 press M 8 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Pooled When this is chosen the factory setting is all extensions except 10 m 2 Key When this is chosen the factory setting is extension 10 only To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all extensions that you want to change Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Mode 313 4 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Line Coverage Extension
384. on 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 1 MES at extension 10 Do one of the following m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Wake Up Service Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 2 Not Assigned Y Wake Up Service Button 115 7 20 Operator Features m Ifyou want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 Using Wake Up Service To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service Button flutters Wake Up Service is activated 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button 3 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press MODO When you have finished entering the time the display reads Wake Up Call 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to
385. on 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value appears 1 Always the factory setting w m 2 Day Only m 3 Night Only Select another procedure or exit programming mode For Release 3 0 or Later To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ OO at extension 10 or 11 Enter the line number The current setting is displayed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Always the factory setting w a 2 Day Only m 3 Night Only To set VMS Hunt Schedule for another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Messaging Systems 9 44 Upgrading the System 1 0 Contents OVEIMIEW aa EE are ae oe wee aaa Siar ede la a 10 1 Battery Replacement 24 06 c4ciesivieriarietad Gn badia bar ieedabee sd be 10 1 Using a PC Catd aia AR apne ee Aa eng ee DA 10 2 Adding New Modules estancada axle Roses ens 10 4 Replacing Modules 22 G ee ce bee oe eee et Ge dt As 10 6 a Replacing Modules in a Stand Alone or 2 Slot Carrier Configuration 10 6 a Replacing Modules in a 5 Slot Carrier 0 2 0 cee eee 10 9 Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 12 a Changing System SettingS 24 02 60 62 a Poe PS Oe wee ee 10 1
386. on LEDs alternately flash red and green to indicate that the connection has been established Considerations Call Screening must be programmed on a button with lights m This feature is not available at tip ring proprietary cordless or wireless telephones m This feature can be turned on only by pressing the programmed button It cannot be accessed by dialing the Call Screening feature access code m An incoming call can be screened at that extension only if the extension is the Line Coverage Extension for that line the call has been transferred to that extension or the call is an intercom call to the extension m If the user is currently on a line or intercom call Call Screening is ignored Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later 8 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m After a call has been sent to the voice mail system you cannot use the Call Screening feature to screen that call Call Screening must be on before or while the call is ringing at the telephone m Users cannot create a conference call while screening a call m While a call is being screened dial pad button pushes are ignored m A user cannot enter program mode while screening a call m Dialable features that interrupt Call Screening are Last Number Redial F05 Station Lock F21 Personal Speed Dial Numbers F80 89 and System Speed Dial F600 699 Programmed buttons that interrupt Call Screening are Do No
387. on on the system telephone at extension 10 to schedule wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Considerations You must program a Wake Up Service Button on the system display telephone at extension 10 m You must program Wake Up Service on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights m A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the next day you must reschedule the call m Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or six rings m Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones m Wake up time is based on System Time 103 m f users answer a wake up call they hear Music On Hold 602 if it is Active If Music On Hold is Not Active users hear silence m Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at the extension m Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the extension the calls are not forwarded m Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage even if VMS Cover is active at the target extension Programming To program a Wake Up Service Button at extensi
388. on to identify the extension to which the doorphone is connected and Doorphone Alert Extensions to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed You can assign some or all of the Doorphone Alert extensions to a Contact Closure Group so that users at those extensions can control the door lock You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Contact Closure button _ Pd oO N Press o0 Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Contact Closure on a System Telephone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Press the programmed button or press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 The green light is on steady If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Step 1 to deactivate the Contact Closure The green light goes off Using Contact Closure on a Single Line Telephone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Pick up the handset to get an intercom dial tone Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Steps 1 and 2 to deactivate the Contact Closure Contact Closure F41 and F42 8 28 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Direct Line Pickup Feat
389. one Dial 8 plus the two digit line number 3 Dial the telephone number Handling Calls 6 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 3 Dial the telephone number Making an Intercom Call An intercom call or inside call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice To make an intercom call on a telephone 1 Do one of the following m Fora system telephone a Lift the handset or press before dialing b Press an idle button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the green light next to the button is on steady m Fora single line telephone lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Doone of the following m To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number m To voice signal a system telephone at the extension press 4 plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone wi
390. one 6 9 speaker 6 8 Speaker Spkr Button 6 3 Speakerphone 9 1 performance tips using 6 9 speakerphone Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 57 speakerphone performance 6 9 special characters B 1 Speed Dial PBX and Centrex Services with 3 15 Speed Dial form C 1 Speed Dialing auto dial buttons 8 4 system speed dial numbers 4 53 8 57 speed dialing system numbers 4 53 Speed Dialing features 8 55 stand alone processor module wall mounting 2 5 Standard Devices answering machines 9 4 auto attendant 9 7 contact closure device 9 9 credit card scanners 9 12 fax machines 9 14 modems 9 25 IN 10 voice messaging system 9 30 Standard Phones automatic line selection for 5 3 call handling 6 15 call waiting 6 10 caller ID information 6 12 dial tones 6 11 dial code features 8 2 display 6 12 feature buttons on 6 12 feature phones 6 10 limitations 6 11 message waiting compatibility 8 43 power failure for use during 6 10 11 2 problems with 11 10 ringing patterns 6 10 speaker on 6 12 switchhook 8 48 system messages 6 12 Standard phones overview 1 12 Standard telephones rotary 1 12 Star Code Dial Delay 4 49 Star Code Dial Delay 410 description 4 49 programming for marked system speed dialing 4 50 star codes dial delay 4 49 Station Lock 8 58 using single line telephone 8 60 system telephone 8 59 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 32 9 36 9 37 9 38 9 39 call accounting devices 9
391. onnects calls continue decreasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Other Telephone Problems 11 14 Troubleshooting Problems with Combination Extensions Telephone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m If the telephone works properly the problem is the REN was too high m If the telephone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do Remove the auxiliary device from the extension Then plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m If the telephone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device m If the telephone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system telephone or the bridging adapter What to do Plug the telephone into the correct jack see Combination Extensions on page 9 2 for instructions m If the telephone works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adap
392. or a PARTNER Attendant This feature can handle three outside calls simultaneously If you have lines programmed for Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial answers the call first A Direct Extension Dial Button must be programmed on a button with lights on the system display telephone at extension 10 This feature is not supported on a button without lights Do not use Direct Extension Dial in places where Hold Disconnect Time 203 is not recognized because if a caller hangs up after Direct Extension Dial answers the line appears to be busy The Direct Extension Dial Button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 If Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the Music on Hold 602 or Ring on Transfer 119 setting Direct Extension Dial Features 7 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use By default unanswered calls return to extension 10 You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different Transfer Return Extension for extension 10 In this case all unanswered Direct Extension Dial calls return to the specified extension as do unanswered calls manually transferred by extension 10 If Do Not Disturb F01 is a
393. orded the red LED associated with this feature becomes red steady m f you attempt to record a call while two others are being recorded and push the red steady Record a Call button the system ignores it m To use this feature you must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PMVS Release 5 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four ports m The person initiating this feature can add additional parties to the conference call until the conference limit is exceeded A user active on a conference call may turn on this feature during the conference m You can place the Record a Call on hold just as if you were placing a conference call on hold Outside parties do not hear Music On Hold since PMVS is still connected to the call If PMVS detects 15 seconds of silence it drops off the call A call that is being recorded cannot be transferred Pressing the transfer button is ignored A call that is being recorded cannot receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call m If you press the Recall button while recording an intercom call the entire conversation is dropped m You cannot join a call that is being recorded m You cannot use Record a Call with Call Screening F25 Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later 8 50 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Record a Call button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button with LEDs 3 Press eature 4 Program a
394. ore redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial numbers cannot be redialed with this feature m A Last Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting A number dialed automatically by using the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature can be redialed with Last Number Redial m Last Number Redial interrupts Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Last Number Redial button Pd N Press o0 Press a programmable button Press Feature O Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Last Number Redial on a System Telephone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or Feature OQ 5 Digits are displayed on system display telephones as they are dialed Using Last Number Redial on a Single Line Telephone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press WHO Redialing Features 8 52 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Save Number Redial F04 Use this feature to save into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from an extension with a system telephone Use this feature to save a number before you hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved NOTE S
395. other extensions from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices can interfere with its operation m You can program Privacy F07 onto a system telephone button to allow or prevent others from joining your calls m Caller ID information is displayed if you join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy F07 activated m Ifa line is not assigned to your extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension you can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL to join a call on that line m You can join a call answered by Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial by pressing the line button and lifting the handset The message stops playing when you join the call m Pooled extension users can add other parties to a call by pressing pool buttons Joining a Call on a System Telephone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call by using a system telephone do one of the following m Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset m Lift the handset and press ntercom 6 6 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call Joining a Call on a Single Line Telephone A steady red light next to a line button
396. oup Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline Programming To identify an external hotline extension 1 2 3 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AG C at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline telephone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 1 ao fF oO DN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number of the external hotline Press Enter the external hotline telephone number exactly as you would dial it Continue programming or exit programming mode Forced Account Codes When you set up forced account codes on the system users at specific extensions must enter an account code before they can dial outside calls Setting up forced account codes involves two features Forced Account Code Entry and optionally Forced Account Code List See Account Code Entry F12 on page 8 2 for instructions on entering forced account codes at a telephone Forced Account Code
397. ove an existing password repeat steps 1 and 2 and press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later 4 47 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Ring on Transfer 119 Use this feature to specify what callers hear while they are being transferred If Ring on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing as they are being transferred if it is set to Not Active callers hear silence unless Music On Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the system If this is the case callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destination extension Once there callers hear ringing until the call is answered or is sent to the voice messaging system Considerations m If you have an audio source connected to the system set Music On Hold 602 to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active so callers hear music as they are being transferred to the destination extension m This feature has no effect on Direct Extension Dial or Call Park Programming To change Ring on Transfer 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AMO at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears 1 Active the factory setting w m 2 Not Active 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Use this feature to change the length of
398. ow these steps to initialize a system 1 Insert the PC Card in the PC Card slot on the processor module 2 If you have a 5 slot carrier make sure the carriers On Off switch is at the Off O position Installing the Control Unit 2 14 3 Press the power cord firmly into the power jack on the carrier or the stand alone processor module until the cord locks into place see Figure 2 16 4 Plug the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded three prong wall outlet that is not controlled by a switch 5 If you have a 5 slot carrier move the On Off switch to the On position Z caution The power cord should hang straight down from the connector for the entire length of the module or carrier Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it 6 If this is the initial installation for a Release 3 0 installation follow these additional steps a Check the LEDs to make sure that the processor is on steady green for at least 15 seconds Checking the LEDs After you power up your system check the green lights on the fronts of the modules see Figure 2 17 m Ifasingle light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and then power up the carrier a f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat either both modules 2 slot carrier or the leftmost module that has a light out 5 slot carrier and then power up the carrier If the lights ar
399. page the group start talking after the beep Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones that are idle or have Do Not Disturb turned off in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the button programmed for ringing a Calling Group You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 8 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To manually ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset and press hiercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Doone of the following m To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring m To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press Transfr 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Using Group Calli
400. peration Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant service of the voice messaging system For Release 3 0 and later systems you can program VMS Hunt Schedule on a per line basis Considerations You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 m If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service button for extension 10 m When the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only and Night service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on lines assigned to the hunt group are sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls do not go to the hunt group Voice Messaging Systems 9 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m When the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only and Night service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on lines assigned to the hunt group are not sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls go to the hunt group Programming For Release 2 0 or Earlier Systems To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QO at extensi
401. pment lines for normal business purposes the lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By placing auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group auxiliary equipment can start sending and answering calls whenever you press the Night Service button at extension 10 NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 9 30 Using Auxiliary Equipment Figure 9 15 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line CONTROL UNIT Figure 9 15 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem To Program To program auxiliary equipment with Night Service 1 Do one of the following m If extension X and Y are key extensions use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover m If extensions X and Y are pooled extensions use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines A and B from all pools and Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from extensions X and Y Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at ext
402. previously to this extension that name appears instead 4 Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter For example the name Ed is OOOO 5 If you make a mistake press Mic HFaD to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name 6 Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode Line Ringing This feature determines how each outside line or pool assigned to an extension rings You can specify Immediate Ring Delayed Ring telephone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring The factory setting for line buttons is Immediate Ring the factory setting for pool buttons is No Ring Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines or pools such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a operator answers all calls or for telephones with no regular users such as those in conference rooms Immediate Ring is the factory setting for lines No Ring is the factory setting for pools Considerations System telephone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring Light patterns do not appear for incoming calls on pool buttons that are set to No Ring If a line at an extension is set to No Ring you must manually select the line to answer a call If a line is set to No Ring Call Screening F25 cannot be used Users automatically receive Caller ID info
403. programmable button Press left Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Hunt Group number 1 6 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal Recall Press a programmable button with lights Touch Tone Enable Press a programmable button Press VMS Cover Press a programmable button Press Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Press a programmable button Press Voice Mailbox Transfer Press a programmable button Press For ringing the first available extension Record A Call Press a programmable button Press For paging the first available extension Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press O
404. pter You can connect a system telephone and a tip ring device or two tip ring devices by using a 267F2 Bridging Adapter Connect the system telephone and or the tip ring device s according to Figure 9 2 267F2 Standard Device Only ___ System Phone or Standard Device gt Figure 9 2 Combination Extension Using Bridging Adapter Combination Extensions 9 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If a Device Has Trouble If a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out use two System Programming features to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls use Distinctive Ring 308 to change the ringing so that all calls ring like outside calls at that extension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 to change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine outside line dial tone Answering Machines Use an answering machine to answer calls when no one can get to the telephone If you have an answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system telephone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up You can connect answering machines to your sys
405. ption 1 11 7 3 problems 11 7 Automated Attendant extensions 9 8 Automated Attendants see Auto Attendant Automatic Backup problems 11 17 Backup Failed Check Card 11 18 Insert Card 11 17 System Busy 11 19 Write Prot 11 17 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 3 9 4 2 8 7 Automatic Extension Privacy 3 13 4 2 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 4 2 Automatic Line Selection 3 11 3 12 5 2 Automatic System Answer 7 3 delay 110 7 5 lines 204 7 6 Automatic System Answer Button 7 4 using 7 5 Automatic System Answer Delay 7 5 Automatic System Answer Lines 7 6 Automatic System Answer Mode 7 7 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 7 8 Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial PC Card 1 10 Automatic Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines 9 15 Automatic VMS Cover 310 9 40 Auxiliary Equipment example setups 4 1 9 1 9 40 overview 1 12 auxiliary equipment 8 15 9 1 Night Service 9 30 Background Music 8 7 using 8 8 backing up system programming 4 3 Backplane 2 8 Backup automatic problems 11 17 manual problems 11 19 Backup Failed Check Card 11 20 IN 1 Advanced Communications System Programming and Use System Busy 11 20 Card is Write Protected 11 19 Invalid Card 11 19 System Busy 11 19 Backup and Restore 4 3 Backup Answering Options 7 2 Backup Problems automatic 11 17 11 19 manual 11 20 Backup Programming Automatic 4 4 4 5 automatic 123 11 17 11 19 Manual 4 5
406. r ID Name Display Press a programmable button with lights Press Conference Drop Press a programmable button Press Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart Continued Contact Closure 1 Press Press a programmable button Press Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button Press left 0 Contact Closure 2 Press a programmable button Press Direct Line Pickup Active Line Press a programmable button Press left Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press Dial a two digit extension number to ring extension or Dial plus the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Press a programmable button with lights Press left Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press O Dial optional two digit extension number VMS Cover Press a programmable button Press Feature M Em Voice Interrupt On Busy 34 Talk Back or Press a programmable button with lights Press Voice Mailbox Transfer Press a programmable button Press Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Press left T Message Light On Press a programmable button Press OO Dial optional two digit extension number Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press lef
407. r more lines to extension X including line A m If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select pools and outside lines first line A selected first For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence This way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines or pools assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring Modems 9 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Music On Hold When Music On Hold is activated and a Music On Hold audio source is connected to the processor module a caller on hold hears music NOTE The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Acco
408. r she is connected to this call Intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can be covered Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls Wake Up Service calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions cannot be covered Do not designate any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system as a covering extension A single extension can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for Call Coverage can have only one covering extension Only one Call Coverage button can be programmed per extension Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later 8 8 Programming amp Using Telephone Features If you activate Call Coverage at your extension you still can intercept an outside call routed for coverage by pressing the outside line button You can program Call Coverage on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off Call Coverage is not active If the Call Coverage feature code and optional originating and covering extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Coverage on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Coverage is on even if calls are covered by a different e
409. r the next call record that prints To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Programming To change the maximum number of digits for dialed numbers that can print on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 6 1 O at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 15 Digits the factory setting m 2 24 Digits 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Talk Time 611 Release 2 0 or Later Use this feature to indicate whether or not you want to include a Talk field on call reports The Talk field records talk time for all incoming outside calls For Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial calls talk time does not include the time during which the greeting plays or the time that the caller spends waiting for someone to answer the call For all other calls talk time is the same as call duration Considerations m If talk time is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 38 Using Auxiliary Equipment If you use Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial you m
410. ramming mode you can press eature Q Or you can lift the handset and then place it back in the cradle NOTE You can talk on the telephone while you program This is useful if you call for support while programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone Using System Programming 3 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program To move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program Remote Programming and Local PC Programming Users of Partner ACS Release 3 0 can perform Remote Programming by using Partner ACS Remote Administration software which is available separately or locally from a PC except for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version For more information about remote programming see the instructions that come with the software Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Programming from extension 10 or 11 to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions All features that can be programmed at an extension can also be programmed by us
411. rdingly for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives You can activate and deactivate Music On Hold and adjust the volume level by programming these features m Music On Hold m Music On Hold Volume Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source You can connect an audio source to the Music On Hold jack on the processor module so that a caller hears music when placed on hold when the Music On Hold feature has been activated Follow these steps to connect an audio source to the Music On Hold jack 1 Insert an RCS phono plug into the Music On Hold jack on the processor module located near the middle of the processor module below the line jacks see Figure 9 14 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Place a call on hold and listen If you do not hear music at any setting the Music On Hold feature may not be activated or properly programmed Music On Hold 9 28 Using Auxiliary Equipment MUSIC ON HOLD Jack AVAVA VAAVAAI INVAVAV Audio Source optional Figure 9 14 Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source Music On Hold 602 Use this feature to activate or deactivate the Music On Hold jack on the processor module The jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack to provide r
412. re 0 0 System Program System Program AQA G The current setting appears 2 Press to choose Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared NOTE You cannot use Next Data or Prev Data in this procedure to choose Option 3 Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm 11 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 Exit programming mode NOTE Using Option 3 to clear a Backup Failure Alarm does not change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 123 It remains either Active or Not Active System Telephone Problems The following section discusses system telephone problems System Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume is set too low What to do Press the volume control button while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m Ifthe telephone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m If the telephone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on m If Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m If Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the
413. ready imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it Some telephones also have a display which provides feedback messages and prompts from the system Figure 6 1 shows a PARTNER 34D telephone the largest of the PARTNER telephones Overview 6 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use l l l l l l l l l l 7 PARTNER 34D PT Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights Line Programmable Buttons 32 with lights oo foo oo oo oo Qofoo oo oo oo oofoo oo oo oo Intercom Buttons 2 bonoong Y soofoo oo oo oo oo 4 A pi oO oo oO 00 00 00 E gt E 2 le Transfr Ext Messagi aka e n L Message Light ees cow vo OOO Figure 6 1 PARTNER 34D Telephone The following buttons and indicators appear on system telephones Display PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D telephones only The display shows the following To adjust the display contrast on the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D telephones press then to decrease the brightness or to increase the bright
414. receive calls NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the central office lines connected to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality Modem for Sending Calls Only You can set up a modem to dial out only see Figure 9 12 With this modem and a terminal you can connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services The telephone shown is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a telephone Modems 9 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Telephone optional mM Figure 9 12 Modem for Sending Only Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions to use the modem To Program To program a modem for sending only 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the modem to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the modem to use to extension X 2 Ifthe modem o
415. redit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system as shown in Figure 9 7 You can install the credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a telephone on the same extension see Combination Extensions on page 9 2 Figure 9 7 Credit Card Scanner Using Credit Card Scanners When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outside line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a telephone you cannot use the telephone while the credit card scanner is operating Programming Credit Card Scanners To program the system for a credit card scanner 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the scanner to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the scanner to use to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the pools and outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Credit Card Scanners 9 12 5 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment If the scanner
416. remove the tray from the desk end Figure 2 28 Plugging in the of the stand and insert it into the Telephone Cord wall end If a 630B wall plate is used the tray hangs down from the telephone m If you do not use the wall plate with the 18 18D and 34D telephones the tray can slide under the set To do this two mounting holes on the left and right sides of the stand allow the tray to slide underneath 7 To mount the telephone onto the stand insert the tabs on the top of the stand into the middle set of notches on the top edge of the telephone see Figure 2 29 8 Make sure the telephone cord is neatly wrapped inside the telephone then rotate the telephone down until the bottom edge snaps into position Figure 2 29 Mounting the Telephone onto the Stand Installing Telephones 2 22 9 10 Remove the plastic cover from the telephone see Figure 2 30 Label the button sheet to show any programmed lines or button features Then place the button sheet on the telephone so the holes fit over the buttons Carefully replace the plastic cover Make sure the swivel display is set to the lowest position Connecting and Testing Telephones Follow these steps to connect and test a telephone 1 To connect a telephone plug the modular telephone mounting cord into a modular wall jack or directly into a module extension jack see Figure 2 31 NOTE To install two telephones or other
417. rence calls with two outside parties 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Programming When a Release 2 0 or later system is operating in Hybrid mode you can group lines into pools to help the routing of calls Use the following features to program the use of pools in the system Mode of Operation m Pool Access Restriction m Pool Extension Assignment m Pool Line Assignment Mode of Operation 198 Use this feature to change the operating mode of your system Your system must be operating in Hybrid mode to support the use of pools Outside Conference Denial 109 4 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming Follow these steps to change the mode of operation of the system to Hybrid mode 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program MUS Enter the system password which is 863285 Enter the number for the mode of operation m 1 for Key the factory setting Y m 2 for Hybrid The system resets Pool Access Restriction 315 Use this feature to restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool For example you may want customer service representatives to make calls using the WATS lines that belong to auxiliary pool 881 but not receive incoming calls on the lines in that pool in this case you assign pool 881 to the customer service representative s telephones and
418. res 8 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Call Log Display button Press o0 Press a programmable button with lights Press B Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode _ Pp oO N Using the Call ID Logging and Dialing Feature When Caller ID information is logged for your extension and you have programmed a Call Log button the word Calls is displayed as shown in Figure 8 1 For the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version the dialed digits will display slightly differently than shown in the illustrations in this document 02 26 Wed Calls 10 53 a m Figure 8 1 System Telephone Display Showing Logged Calls To view the log 1 Press your preprogrammed Call Log button The green light flutters and the Call Log is activated One of several messages appears 2 Press the More button repeatedly until you see the Telephone Number Display shown in Figure 8 2 908 555 1234 Next Prev Dial More Figure 8 2 Telephone Number Display On the Telephone Number Display the newest call in the log is shown The log shows the calls in last in first out order Caller ID Features 8 22 Programming amp Using Telephone Features An Out of Area message appears if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A Privacy message appears if the ca
419. restrict the pool to Out Only This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension set to In Only or No Access for a particular pool cannot select that pool to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Considerations m For extension 10 and any extensions for which Line Access Mode 313 is set to Key this feature is automatically set to No Access m When a user has access to a pool for outgoing calls you can customize dialing restrictions for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 To restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making calls on individual lines you must use Line Access Restriction 302 m Caller ID information does not appear for ringing calls on lines belonging to a pool programmed for Out Only or for No Access Programming To restrict an extension from making or receiving calls on all the lines in a specific pool 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 OQS 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed A display similar to the following appears Pool Access Rstr 23 Pool Pool Programming 4 42 Programming System Options Enter the pool number 880 881 882 or 883 to be restricted at this extension The current restriction is displayed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction calls permitted o
420. rier is important place the modules as instructed in the following procedure For a 5 slot carrier you need four 12 screws of the appropriate type for the wall and weight of the control unit a control unit with four expansion modules and a processor module weighs approximately 31 pounds or 14 kilograms The weight of other configurations may vary slightly Installing the Control Unit 2 8 Follow these steps to wall mount the 5 slot carrier and modules 1 Using the enclosed template mark the screw locations on the wall see Figure 2 8 If you are mounting the carrier on plywood start four 12 screws supplied with the carrier leaving the screw heads extending approximately 1 4 inch 0 64 cm from the wall If you are mounting on drywall use wall anchors which must be purchased separately Before installing any modules make sure the clear plastic protector has been removed from the connector area on the rear of each module To remove the protector grasp the tabs on the ends of the protector and lift see Figure 2 9 Insert the PARTNER ACS processor module in the center slot of the carrier Installation Carrier Figure 2 8 Mounting Screw Locations Tab Ay im LOT Tab Figure 2 9 Removing the Plastic Protector Installing the Control Unit 2 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use
421. ring extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time at the user s extension before it goes to the transfer return extension If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence If a user at a covering extension has a system display telephone and is busy on a call he or she can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent If a user is not active on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing he or she can press the line pool or buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent However if the user picks up the handset he or she joins or answers the call that was previously ringing at the originating extension shown on the display Call Coverage does not apply to parked calls See Call Park If you want calls answered by Call Coverage to be logged as unanswered calls use Call Log Line Associations to associate the lines with extensions for logging unanswered calls You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later 8 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Call Coverage button 1 Press o0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 3 Atthis point you can do one of the fol
422. rmation when calls ring at the extension Line Ringing 5 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To change the way outside lines or pools ring at an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line or pool buttons show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines or pools assigned to the extension If a line or pool is not assigned to a button the green light next to that button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line or pool button Immediate Ring on steady m Delayed Ring flashes slowly m No Ring flutters quickly Press the line or pool button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently selected line or pool also appears on the display 4 Continue programming or exit programming mode Line Ringing 5 6 Using the Telephones 6 Contents OVEIMEW eaa ae Pate see Sate AD we ee eee eee 6 1 System Telephones 2 csicadebastideiiageigeieiiedad ous tddiaeawiasiadds 6 1 a Buttons and Indicators vel cir ve gata oes Bade O ce eh gees hd 6 1 US E cea aS ceed E A Seaton a en ee ey aaa 6 5 a PINGING Pates a a ars Sch bee Bae iaa Pe 6 7 A A at Otte a AIG ee SRE ice Pak Ae AEA ine IRD a CHR Sod Lido a St
423. rogram that button for intercom ringing intercom voice signaling or manual signaling m When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening m Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension m PARTNER 6 telephones have only four buttons available for lines pools and or Auto Dial numbers A combined total of 800 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed m For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Auto Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services on page 3 14 for more information m You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Call Park Message Light On Message Light Off Station Unlock and Voice Mailbox Transfer m To setup a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine stat
424. ry Equipment Call Reports A call report is a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each call record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 9 16 DATE TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT C 04 26 97 11 11 1028812015558014 00 01 40 08 18 C 04 26 97 11 34 1023319085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 I 04 26 97 13 35 IN 00 02 12 01 10 I 04 26 97 13 38 9085559111 00 01 22 12 U5 Figure 9 16 Sample Call Report Each page contains up to 59 records The report has the following fields Call Type C indicates outgoing calls I indicates incoming calls Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy format where mm is the month ddis the day and yyis the year Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute in 24 hour military time Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial Number preceded by an F This field holds a maximum of either 15 or 24 digits depending on the setting of SMDR Output Format 610 The Number field in Figure 9 16 is set to hold 24 digits A T character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the digits that this field holds If both of these
425. s Standard phone two IROB protector plus one carbon block protector Installation of a Contact Closure Adjunct controlled device outside the building requires a 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 to protect the control unit from electrical surges System phones SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2 pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Class 2 power standards UL 1012 Standard for Safety Power Supplies UL 1310 Standard for Safety Direct Plug in Transformers UL 1585 Standard for Safety Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers Canada Meets CSA C22 2 No 0 7 M1985 Evaluating the Environment 2 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Installing the Control Unit The stand alone processor module or a carrier and its modules are referred to as the control unit The control unit must always be wall mounted NOTE Before installing the system be sure you read the safety instructions in the front of this guide N WARNING There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous
426. s Use Transfer Return Extension 306 for extensions Z1 and Z2 to ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system return to extension 10 if they are not answered Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to Hunt Group 7 Set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 Set the VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Make sure a Night Service Button 503 is assigned at extension 10 When Night Service is on callers hear the night menu when no one is available to answer their calls Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button at extension 10 so the operator can transfer calls directly to extension X s and Y s mailboxes without first ringing their telephones This is useful when the operator knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group nercm DM at extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages with one touch Additional VMS Programming To program the system for a voice mail system VMS you must program the following features Automatic VMS Cover VMS Cover Ring VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule Automatic VMS Cover 310 Use this feature to automatically route an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings factory setting for all system extensions is three rings so callers can leave a message Considerations Single lin
427. s 4 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Forced Account Code Entry 307 NOTE This feature applies only to system telephones Forced Account Code Entry identifies extensions at which users must enter an account code before making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client Considerations m For Release 2 0 or earlier systems you cannot dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 until an account code is entered at a Forced Account Code Entry extension If a Forced Account Code List exists the account code must match an entry on the list for you to get an outside line m For Release 3 0 or later systems you can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code at a Forced Account Code Entry extension You can make 911 999 for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 only calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 999 for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 only has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List m You can enter account codes manually or by using System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers or Auto Dialing but not Marked System Speed Dial numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with Forced Account Code Entry you must manually select a line or pool after entering an account code Do not ass
428. s packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Using Loudspeaker Paging on a Single Line Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial OO Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system NOTE For touch tone telephones only if your Loudspeaker Paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Paging Features 8 45 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Simultaneous Paging I 70 Use this feature to access the Loudspeaker Paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module and all of the idle systems telephones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Considerations You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system telephone to access with one touch the Loudspeaker Paging system and idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 m If the Loudspeaker Paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m If someone answers a loudspeaker page from a system telephone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call m If some extensions in Calling Group 1 have single line MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephones those extension
429. s Otherwise the system selects an idle line from a pool automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific single line telephone extensions there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller hears a busy tone if a single line telephone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in for the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties You can make a voice signaled call from a single line telephone but if you try to make a voice signaled call to a single line telephone it rings because the single line telephone does not have a system speaker You cannot use the System Password You cannot access the following system features Account Code Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Do Not Disturb Caller ID Logging and Dialing Feature Exclusive Hold Manual Signaling Privacy Save Number Redial VMS Cover Voice Interrupt On Busy Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back or Voice Mailbox Transfer You can however use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 and Automatic VMS Cover 310 which are similar to the Privacy and VMS Cover features Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a single line telephone because the telephone canno
430. s Not Active the system uses the normal processing of restricted numbers it checks digit by digit to see whether the number is restricted If the first digit dialed is a and is not restricted the call goes through without further checking since it can no longer match any number on the list If Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system permits the following star codes m 2 digit codes where the first digit is O 1 or 4 9 and the second digit is 0 9 for example amp O 000 m 3 digit codes where the first digit is 2 or 3 the second digit is 0 9 and the third digit is 0 9 for example O When Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system checks the first two digits dialed If the first digit is a y or the first two digits are 11 the system checks whether the following two or three digits are a star code If the digits are a recognized star code the system resets dialing restrictions after accepting the star code digits The digits that follow the star code are compared again to the restrictions More than one star code can be dialed at the beginning of a dialing sequence the system resets to check dialing restrictions as often as necessary For example HOMWODOOWDOAOOO can be dialed to block Caller ID information and to turn off Call Waiting the system still checks to see whether the 555 2539 number is restricted After a star code is dialed some central offices respond by providing a second dial tone as a
431. s Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call while the user is active on another call You can use Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back only from a system telephone Considerations m Program Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights Programming To program a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button 1 Press Feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button with lights 3 Press 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back To respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold Voice Interrupt Features 8 65 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated Respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator h
432. s a programmed Auto Dial button From a single line telephone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you have intercom dial tone See Appendix C for a listing of dial code features Account Code Entry F12 Use this feature to enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code typically is used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Considerations You can use Account Code Entry only on system telephones When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports If an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints changed account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered For forced accoun
433. s a problem one of the following messages appears see Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions m Card is Write Protected m Insert Valid Card m SystemBusy If there is no problem the display instructs you to press Enter to begin the backup Press Enter A status message is displayed indicating that a backup is in progress and within 30 seconds a message appears indicating the result If the backup was successful the new backup information replaces the information in the old MAN mmddyy file on the Backup Restore PC Card and the mmddyy extension now reflects the current date Backup information created during a manual backup does not overwrite any AUTO mmddyy file If the backup failed you see one of the following error messages see Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions m Backup Failed Check Card m Backup Failed SystemBusy Backup and Restore 4 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 Exit programming mode NOTE If you exit the procedure before the backup finishes you do not interrupt the backup but you do not see feedback messages on the display Restore Programming 125 Use this feature to reinstate your system and telephone programming except the System Day System Date and System Time to the settings saved on a PC Card at the last system backup manual or automatic You should restore the
434. s are not included in the simultaneous page because they do not have built in speakers m Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the Loudspeaker Paging system Programming To program a Simultaneous Paging button _ Pp oO N Press Feature OQ O Press a programmable button Press left intercom O Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Simultaneous Paging on a System Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system and the idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 2 Press the programmed button or intercom 4 7 9 then lift the handset Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system and the speakers of all idle system telephones in Calling Group 1 NOTE If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Paging Features 8 46 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Simultaneous Paging on a Single Line Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system and the idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial HOO Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system and the speakers of all idle system tel
435. s feature is available only on system telephones m You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch m For system telephones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Exclusive Hold F02 8 32 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m Ifyou place a call on a line or a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it no longer is available to you To ensure that no one else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold m This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming To program an Exclusive Hold button 1 2 3 4 Press OO Press a programmable button Press o Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Exclusive Hold While active on an outside call on a system telephone 1 Press the programmed button or Feature 0 2 to put the call on Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line pool or button flutters At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red To retrieve the call press the line pool or button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press Skr NOTE You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension at which it was put on Exclusive Hold
436. s help the system operator handle outside calls during peak calling periods When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Automatic System Answer the system answers it after a specified number of rings and plays a short user recorded greeting to the caller Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system does one of the following m Places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available Automatic System Answer Features 7 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available m Disconnects the call The Automatic System Answer features that follow are available in systems of Release 2 0 or later m Automatic System Answer Button m Automatic System Answer Delay m Automatic System Answer Lines m Automatic System Answer Mode m Automatic System Answer Record Playback Considerations m The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately m Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message Au
437. s in a list you must press Next Procedure Prev Procedure since entering and a three digit code is considered part of the telephone number ZN security ALERT If you are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user can avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers Programming To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers _ ao fF oO DN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A QO at extension 10 or 11 At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 6 7 Do one of the following m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove m To add other telephone numbers to this list press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 Select another procedure by using Next Procedure Prev Procedure or exit programm
438. se Table A 6 Calling Privileges and Restrictions Features Continued Activity For Feature Name Page Other calling privileges To enter your password for off hours calls All Night Service Group Extensions 4 34 System Password 4 51 Table A 7 System Manager Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Customizing your system To set the system wide time System System Date 3 7 Managers only System Day 3 7 System Time 3 7 Set up account codes so that calls canbe N A Forced Account Code Entry 4 27 billed or tracked to a specific client or Forced Account Code List 4 29 project Set up which line is selected when a user Alltelephones Automatic Line Selection 5 2 lifts the handset or presses the Speaker button Set up a single line telephone so that it For single line External Hotline 4 26 dials a specific inside extension or outside telephones HotLine 4 37 number as soon as someone lifts the only handset Adjust the ringing options at an extension All Abbreviated Ringing 4 2 Distinctive Ring 4 25 Adjust the system dial tone to N A Intercom Dial Tone 4 38 accommodate a voice messaging system or modem Control what a caller hears while waiting N A Music On Hold 9 29 for the system during transfer while on hold or during other operations where the caller must wait Change the language used English Display Display Language 4 24 Canadian French or Latin American telep
439. se features while using Call Screening F25 Caller ID Features 8 18 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Caller ID Inspect F17 Use this feature to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold You can inspect ringing active or held calls Considerations m Program Caller ID Inspect on a button with lights on a system display telephone m Make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect button is fluttering before pressing a line or pool button otherwise the call you are on is disconnected and you are connected to the call on the line or pool button that was pressed m You can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons If the call is an intercom call the factory set display is shown m If you are not active on a call you can press line pool and intercom buttons to view Caller ID or Call Coverage information for those lines however if you pick up the handset you join or answer the call shown on the display m If you program a Caller ID Name Display button you can toggle between Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines m A user ata covering extension who has a system display telephone and who is busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent Programming To program a Caller ID Inspect button 1 AUN Press o0 Press a programmabl
440. see Account Code Entry You also can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that must enter account codes prior to dialing outside telephone numbers including those on the Emergency Phone Number List You can signal then speak to system telephone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 is Assigned for the recipient Making an Outside Call The following instructions assume that system telephones are set via Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines first and single line telephones are set to select intercom first This means that when you lift the handset of a system telephone you hear outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when you lift the handset of a single line telephone you hear intercom dial tone Making an Outside Call on a System Telephone To make an outside call on a system telephone 1 Lift the handset or press Spek The green light next to a line or pool button is on steady and you hear the outside dial tone 2 Dial the telephone number On a system display telephone the dialed number appears on the display Handling Calls 6 16 Using the Telephones If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Press the idle line button re
441. settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel Considerations Resetting the system disconnects all active calls This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process Most of the system and telephone programming settings that were in effect before the power failure or down period are retained they do not revert to the default settings Automatic System Answer Button 111 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Night Service Button 503 and Station Lock return to the status on or off that they were in immediately prior to the system reset The VMS Cover button and Privacy button return to the status on or off determined by the programmed setting of Automatic VMS Cover 310 and Automatic Extension Privacy 304 respectively For example If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be on again after the system reset However if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be off after the system reset A successful use of Restore Programming 125 causes a System Reset Programming Saved to o
442. setup allows you to place a call by using one of the main pool buttons place that call on hold and make another call by using the second main pool button Or you can establish a conference call by using lines in the main pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool can be assigned to an extension for a maximum of five pool buttons per extension System telephone users can press any of the available pool buttons on their telephones or they can enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to make an outside call Single line telephone users must dial 9 or enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to access a pool since their telephones do not have pool buttons After you press a pool button or enter a pool access code the system selects a free line from the pool for you to make the call You can access a pool as long as there is at least one available line in the pool Hybrid mode allows users who have system telephones with fewer buttons to have access to multiple outside lines and various types of pools You can make efficient use of outside lines by grouping those of a similar type or function together For example you can create an auxiliary pool of WATS or international lines and assign the pools to different groups of users Additionally individual lines can be assigned to a manager s extension so that he or she always has access to an outside line In Hybrid mode extension 10 a ways operates like an extension in Key mode This
443. sion for that line Programming To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension Pp oO N Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 2 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the desired line number Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line Do one of the following m To delete the current setting press Remove m To program another line press Next tem or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Coverage Extension 208 4 40 Programming System Options Outside Conference Denial 109 Use this feature to determine if users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Considerations m This feature setting applies to all system users A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties Programming To allow or disallow conferences with two outside parties 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ OO at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties the factory setting w m 2 Disallow confe
444. sion to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party Programming To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 4 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value displays m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Backup and Restore You should back up the system programming periodically onto a Backup Restore PC Card especially if you are changing the processor module or upgrading the system or before and after any major programming changes You can back up the programming automatically or manually Occasionally you may have to restore programming from the backed up file NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system and perform backup and restore functions remotely or locally with a PC Backup and Restore 4 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Whenever you change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic from Not Active to Active a backup occurs at the next occurren
445. splay Programmable Buttons AA ES 4 without lights Eu E a E e go E E 8 80 BO BO Line Programmable Buttons ss BO BO Sa 16 with lights a E eE BCA n eee Intercom Buttons 2 ees gi Ext Message Bl Message Light AA a MO E Feature gt Conf I I o 7 Se EN Transfr I a i Ei 000 o fs 00 ws OOW SE Figure 6 2 PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 Telephones If the PARTNER telephone has a display indicated by a D in the model name you receive messages and prompts when making calls and when programming A system display telephone is required for system programming Valid system lines and extensions depend on which release of PARTNER ACS you have as follows Throughout this guide all references to system lines or system extensions are within these release dependent ranges m Release 1 x Lines range from 01 to 15 Extensions range from 10 to 41 m Release 2 x or later Lines range from 01 to 19 Extensions range from 10 to 49 System Telephones 6 4 Table 6 1 summarizes PARTNER system telephone features Table 6 1 PARTNER Telephones Feature PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 Using the Telephones Number of programmable but
446. ss followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone If Call Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a single line telephone connected The user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook on a single line telephone to place calls on hold park a call transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call If the single line telephone has a message light use it to notify users of messages If you have a voice messaging system the light indicates that a message has been left in your mailbox On a single line telephone the message light flashes when the telephone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Ringing Patterns Single line telephones have these ringing patterns An outside call will ring ring ring An intercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring Single Line Telephones 6 10 Using the Telephones NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to telephones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones Single line telephones have two different dial tones Outside dial tone is generated by your
447. ssword Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours m If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only The status of the Night Service Button at extension 10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode m The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 728 being used Night Service Button 503 7 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Night Service Button at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program OQO at extension 10 Do one of the following m If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Night Service Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 2 Not Assigned Y f you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode
448. stem Telephone To use System Speed Dial on a system telephone 1 2 Lift the handset or press before dialing Do one of the following m If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number m If you want to call on a line in a specific pool at a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 Press Feature Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed appears on a display telephone unless it is a Marked System Speed Dial number Speed Dialing Features 8 57 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using System Speed Dial on a Single Line Telephone To use System Speed Dial on a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Station Lock F21 Use this feature to enter a four digit code on your telephone dialpad to lock your extension Later you enter the identical code to unlock the extension Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from these extensions You should
449. stem does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Distinctive Ring 308 4 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 3 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears 1 Active outside intercom and transferred calls ring differently using the system s distinctive ringing patterns the factory setting w m 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls all ring using a single ring burst To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode External Hotline 311 Use this feature to identify an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a single line telephone not a system telephone and should not have a dialpad After you identify an external hotline extension you must store the external telephone number for t
450. stem is cut off the first two lines on the processor module or the 308EC module automatically connect to the first two extensions on that module and the first line on each 206 module connects to its first extension This enables you to make and answer calls during a power outage provided you have a single line telephone connected to any of these extensions During a power failure single line telephones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available The system can stay programmed for a minimum of 45 days and a maximum of six months after it stops receiving power depending on the freshness of the batteries When the batteries are drained all of the system s programmed settings return to the factory settings You should install fresh batteries every year Battery Replacement The PARTNER ACS processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure Power Failure Operation 11 2 Troubleshooting for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When battery power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display telephones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should be instructed to notify you when they see this message You should replace the batteries w
451. sure Group to also be the Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 for that doorphone m When an extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user at that extension can use Contact Closure to activate the contact closure device Programming To assign extensions to a Contact Closure Group 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OQA at extension 10 or 11 At the Contact Number prompt enter the number for the Contact Closure 1 or 2 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the two digit extension number that you want to assign to this Contact Closure Group 4 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to the Contact Closure Group m 2 Not Assigned to the Contact Closure Group the factory setting Y Contact Closure Adjunct 9 10 5 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another extension to the same Contact Closure Group press Next Item or Prev item until the correct extension appears Then repeat Step 4 m To assign extensions to the other Contact Closure Group press or and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Use this feature to specify how long the Contact Closures remain active when they are activated A Contact Closure can be activated for 1 3 or 5 seconds or the Contact Closure can be set to t
452. switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines m Avoid placing your telephone in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans m Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through m Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your telephone system m When talking always face your telephone and stay within two feet of it m Place your telephone at least six inches 15 cm away from the edge of your desk m If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation m In conference rooms a separate speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system telephone is designed for individual use System Telephones 6 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Single Line Telephones In addition to system telephones you can conn
453. t Disturb F01 Save Number Redial F04 Last Number Redial F05 and Station Lock F21 m Ifthe voice messaging system extension does not have Automatic Extension Privacy 304 turned on other users can bridge onto the call If a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system and it disconnects from the call This causes the screening extension to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with the feature Press a programmable button with LEDs Press Feature 35 Program another extension or exit programming mode Sn fF oO NM Caller ID Features Caller ID is available on system display telephones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number or name if available When active on a call you automatically receive Caller ID information for the duration of the call When your extension is idle you receive Caller ID information for the call you will be connected to when you lift the handset The following Caller ID features can be implemented by individual telephone users Caller ID Inspect Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing Caller ID Name Display You can use all the
454. t Group and you leave your desk A call to your extension will then move directly to the next available extension in the group m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover m When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 8 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Hunt Group button Press 00 Press a programmable button 1 Do one of the following To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt Group press left and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a System Telephone To use the programmed button To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press pkr and press the programmed button If you are voice signaling start talking after the beep To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group Lift the handset and press intercom
455. t O Group Calling Ring Page For ringing group Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 For paging group Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press H Recall Press a programmable button with lights Press Record A Call Press a programmable PAE with lights Press Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal For ringing the first available extension Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 For voice signaling the first available extension Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Hunt Group number 1 6 Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press OD Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button Press left 0 Group Pickup Press a programmable button Press left O O Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Station Lock Press a programmable button Press Station Unlock Press a programmable button Press Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press Touch Tone Enable Press a programmable button Press PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the Extension Telephone Programming Flow C
456. t code entry with a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code If a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when entering or changing an account code by pressing after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you hear a denial tone The Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device s documentation to determine the maximum digits supported You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry Account Code Entry F12 8 2 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify system telephone extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call NOTE With Release 3 0 or later users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to
457. t get dial tone and make calls A display on a single line telephone will not show Caller ID information system messages or Caller ID Call Logging information A speaker on a single line telephone is not a system integrated speaker therefore it cannot receive voice type calls such as a group page Feature Telephones A feature telephone is a single line telephone that has buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dial pad For example there are feature telephones that have programmable Auto Dial buttons last number buttons buttons and built in speakers You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature telephone and program them onto a feature telephone button However there are some limitations to what these telephones can do Single Line Telephones 6 12 Using the Telephones The capabilities of a feature telephone are in the telephone itself For example if you store a number on a feature telephone s Auto Dial button that number is stored in the feature telephone This is different from storing a number on a system telephone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system telephone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a button on a feature telephone the call is held at the telephone itself Callers do not hear the system s Music On Hold Other telephones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you w
458. tance calls to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance Considerations m You must program an Outgoing Call Restriction Button on the system telephone at extension 10 m You must program Outgoing Call Restriction on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights m The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction Button and the telephone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature m You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction Button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode m Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction Button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer m You must use an Auto Dial Button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button You should use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system telephone at extension 10 provided the button has lights Programming To program an Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQAA at extension 10 2 Doone of the following
459. tem or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Groups of Extensions 4 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Hold Disconnect Time 203 Use this feature to change the hold disconnect time for an outside line this feature is not available for the Hong Kong Release 3 0 version When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up the hold disconnect time is probably set too high or set at No Detection Considerations m Ifthe telephone company does not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to 450 msec the factory setting The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call and then hanging it up m Shorten the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect m Lengthen the hold disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected prematurely Programming To change the hold disconnect time 1
460. tem Program 6 0 9 The system responds by printing the call report page header 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SMDR Output Format 610 Use this feature to specify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers in the Number field on the call report The longer field is useful for businesses such as law offices and hotels that need to record many digits for outgoing calls for billing purposes Before changing to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that 24 digit output is supported Considerations m If the output format is set to 15 digits and a prints as the last digit of a dialed number on a call report indicating that the digits dialed exceed the 15 digits the Number field can hold you may want to change the output format to 24 digits m f the output format is set to 24 digits and SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active the combined length of the fields for a call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits m When you change the output format the length of the Number field is adjusted fo
461. tem Telephone and so unplug the D8W line cord Intercom Autodialer connected to the IN jack on the bottom of the Autodialer from the J1 jack on the adapter then plug it back in Connecting Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional telephone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many tip ring single line devices work with the system regardless of the manufacturer See Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment for further details about connecting auxiliary equipment including voice messaging systems Connecting Auxiliary Equipment 2 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications nonr metalation roaa and Use Connecting Auxiliary Equipment SS SS a A AAA OM 2 26 Initial System Programming 3 Contents OVEVIEW AE nda Bory 3 1 System Programming BaSicS 0 00 cee tees 3 1 Using System Programming 2 aie Cala ee Ri ae eel ae et ieee ate ee 3 2 a Programming Overlays lt ds E yaa dak heat eed sida et 3 2 s Button Locations aas caesi breed da de ERA Rhee EEA Ca ERA 3 4 a Programming Mode a Giese Sac suas Deke Rad am a eee A za 3 5 a Changing Programming TyYpe o ocooccocc eee 3 6 a Remote Programming and Local PC Programming coccccccccc o 3 6 Using Centralized Telephone Programming 000 0c eee eee e eee 3 6 Setting the Date Day and Time 0 0 0
462. tem in the following ways m System answering machine One or more answering machines can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine s to retrieve messages m Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a telephone to answer calls to that extension NOTE If you have an answering machine and a system telephone on the same extension the answering machine can answer calls only when the telephone is idle System Answering Machine One or more answering machines can serve the entire system see Figure 9 3 The answering machine can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install the answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a telephone on the same extension see Combination Extensions on page 9 2 Answering Machines 9 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment Telephone optional CONTROL UNIT More Than Single One Machine Machine Figure 9 3 System Answering Machines To Retrieve Messages Do one of the following to retrieve messages m Goto the machine to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code m From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code When you call from the outside
463. tem telephone on one extension the extension is called a combination extension If you combine a single line telephone and a system telephone on one extension you may want to turn off the single line telephone s ringer during normal use You cannot install two system telephones on the same extension and the combined REN Ringer Equivalence Number of two devices on one extension cannot exceed 2 0 The REN for a system telephone is 0 0 NOTE You can connect a tip ring device to a system telephone that also has an Intercom Autodialer installed Tip Ring Device Requirements 9 2 Using Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER telephones have a built in auxiliary jack so you can connect a tip ring device directly to the telephone without using a bridging adapter this is called a direct connection If your telephone does not have a built in auxiliary jack or if you want to connect two tip ring devices together you must use a 267F2 Bridging Adapter Using a Direct Connection You can connect a tip ring device directly to a system telephone by plugging the cord from the tip ring device into the AUX jack on the bottom of the system telephone see Figure 9 1 System Phone Plug line into jack labeled LINE Sal lee Plug standard device into jack labeled AUX Figure 9 1 Combination Extension Using Direct Connection Using a Bridging Ada
464. tep 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Hunt Group Extensions 505 Use this feature to assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group When extensions are ina Hunt Group an incoming call searches or hunts for the first available extension The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for transferring and detecting fax calls For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G on page 8 34 Considerations Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt Group If a ringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 on page 4 33 Groups of
465. ter from the wall jack Then unplug the telephone from the adapter and plug the telephone directly into the wall jack m f the telephone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging adapter use only a 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the helpline m If the telephone still does not work properly call the helpline Problems with Combination Extensions 11 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Problems with Tip Ring Devices Tip Ring Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A tip ring device such as a fax machine or answering machine does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as it does for outside calls m f the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Tip Ring Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A tip ring device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m Ifthe device
466. th Voice Interrupt On Busy assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response lf you hear ringing you have reached an idle single line MLC 6 TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy not assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Handling Calls 6 18 Using the Telephones Answering Calls This section describes how you can answer calls ringing at your extension Additional features allow you to pick up calls at other extensions Considerations Calls that are answered by pressing a pool button can be held conferenced or transferred however pool buttons cannot be used to join calls There are several ways to access a line for answering calls On either a system telephone or a single line telephone lift the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system telephone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time Onasystem telephone press a specific line pool or button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing Intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Onasingle line telephone you
467. the Network Interface Jack Figure 2 20 Connecting Cords to Extension Jacks Connecting Lines and Extensions 2 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Installing the Cover If you have a 5 slot carrier it is important to install the cover to keep the modules dust free and properly seated and the system working efficiently Install the cover for the 5 slot carrier by following these steps see Figure 2 21 1 To cover the modules grasp the upper edges of the cover and hold it squarely over the control unit 2 Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place 3 Insert the 6 screw into the tab on the lower front of the cover Tighten the screw Figure 2 21 Installing the Cover Installing Telephones After you have installed the control unit and have connected the line and extension cords you are ready to install the telephones Installing the telephones includes assembling connecting and testing the telephone As desired you also can connect an Intercom Autodialer to certain telephones Assembling PARTNER Telephones All PARTNER telephones are shipped with a stand for either desk mounting or wall mounting the telephone For other telephones see the instructions that are provided with the telephone Desk Mounting the Telephone Follow these steps to desk mount a telephone 1 Gently place the te
468. the adapter into the printer s or PC s RS 232C serial port SMDR Jack Call Accounting Terminal Printer optional lt gt Figure 9 17 Connecting to the SMDR Jack Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Processor Module Lucent a avenTisseM Ferrite Core Figure 9 18 Installing the Ferrite Cord SMDR Programming The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR function of the system provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report Use the following features to program the SMDR m SMDR Record Type m SMDR Top of Page SMDR Output Format SMDR Talk Time SMDR Record Type 608 Use this feature to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 36 Using Auxiliary Equipment Considerations The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by System Date 101 and System Time 103 m The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m f Account Code Entry optional or forced is used to enter an account code for a call the account code prints on the call report If there are
469. the faint sound of Unique Line Ringing 209 4 57 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call NOTE Voice Interrupt On Busy is available only on system telephones Considerations The Voice Interrupt On Busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep If a Voice Interrupt On Busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead If you receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call and press Hola the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call Do one of the following To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a Voice Interrupt On Busy call has ended To resume your conversation with the third party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light Any party involved in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call cannot be involved in a second Voice Interrupt On Busy call until the first is finished Voice Interrupt On Busy cannot be performed on Record a Call The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt
470. ti Pic et pg Che Bae ed Babee Aha Shee da ye bates 5 3 Extension Name Display 0 000 cece ee 5 4 a Considerations O a tO toa ak ek artes tht One AOS 5 4 a Programming errada at A ound baba ee 5 5 LING RINGING isere teie teeta es dees ieee eee ia wen os Sate tees ees 5 5 a Considerations secs sia ke bar tada bae 5 5 a PIOGFAMIMIAG veas aya dato 4 Seale eee aed Bie aie eek ee e ee 5 6 PARTNER A Advanped Aa ku metalation Poara and Use Initial Telephone Programming Overview As the System Administrator you should program telephones at individual extensions with certain features There are two types of telephone programming Centralized Telephone Programming programming individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 Extension Programming programming an individual system telephone from the extension to which it is connected Use Centralized Telephone Programming to program the features presented in this chapter You need a system display telephone for Centralized Telephone Programming NOTE If you have any 34 button telephones in the system you must use a 34 button display telephone to program since an 18 button telephone cannot be used to program a 34 button telephone Also if your system has both PARTNER and MLS telephones you should use a PARTNER display telephone at the programming extension Overview 5 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use R
471. tination extension does not answer Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the auto attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Programming To identify an extension where an auto attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AOOO at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to which the auto attendant is connected To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting w To assign or unassign a second auto attendant extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Auto Attendant 9 8 Contact Closure Adjunct Using Auxiliary Equipment The Contact Closure Adjunct plugs into a jack on the processor module and has two Contact Closures to control devices such as an electronic door lock as shown in Figure 9 5 or an alert The device being controlled must be wired to the Adjunct by an electrician in accordance with local electrical codes Program the following features to enable the use of the Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Group Contact Closure Operation Type Contact Closure 1 Door with Electronic Lock Ext Y Doorphone Alert Extension Figure 9 5 Contact Closure Adjunct Co
472. ting capability m If the telephone is supported go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The single line telephone is not connected to the proper module What to do Make sure the telephone is connected to a processor 308EC or R3 0 or later 206 module If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Telephone Problems Trouble Making Outside Calls Trouble making outside calls can be one of the following situations m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone which cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring m You hear a busy signal as you dial m You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code m If you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find
473. tion for his or her extension should be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a single line telephone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on Line 1 would be Intercom 1 Required Telephone Programming 5 2 Initial Telephone Programming Considerations m If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must manually select a line or pool after entering a required account code m Foran extension identified as a Hotline 603 or Doorphone Extension 604 605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence Foran extension identified as an External Hotline 311 program the extension to select outside lines or pools first m For single line touch tone or rotary telephones or for any telephone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first m For combination extensions the Automatic Line Selection for both devices including a tip ring device follows the automatic line selection for the extension m You do not need to include all available lines or pools for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically Programming To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program
474. tions low medium and high The System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 settings appear as the factory set display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display telephone Users can assign a name to his or her extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Extension Name Display for more information Using the Telephones Handling Calls The following call handling functions are available from both system and single line telephones m Making calls m Answering calls m Placing calls on hold m Conference calls m Transferring calls m Joining calls Making Calls You can make a call by dialing an outside telephone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number Hybrid Mode Only Making calls on a system operating in Hybrid mode is the same as in Key mode except you can select a pool button rather than a line button to access an outside line When you press a pool button the system automatically selects an idle line belonging to the pool To access a line in a pool that is not assigned
475. to an electrical outlet m If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The cord is defective System Telephone Problems 11 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the Intercom Autodialer works the cord is faulty Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement m If the Intercom Autodialer does not work call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Record a Call Light is Always Red Steady and You Can t Record a Call Possible Cause 1 You do not have enough ports assigned into Hunt Group 7 What to do You must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PMVS Release 5 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four ports MLC 6 Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Unique Line Ringing 209 has been set to a pattern other than 1 Release 3 0 or later What to do Set the ring pattern to Pattern 1 For MLC 6 telephones always set the ring pattern to 1 Single Line Telephone Problems Single Line Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m Ifthe telephone rings the problem is solved m If the telephone still d
476. to that extension or to access a line in a pool that the you are already using press and dial the pool access code If all lines in a pool are busy you hear busy tone You can program Automatic Line Selection to change the way the system selects pools when a user lifts the handset to make a call To restrict an extension s access to all lines assigned to a pool use Pool Access Restriction 315 If users are not allowed outgoing access to a pool they hear a reorder tone after dialing the pool access code at the intercom dial tone Considerations Consider the following when you make calls m You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a button so a user can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing m You can program outside numbers for one extension or for the entire system so a user can dial a number by pressing or on a single line telephone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for System Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers Handling Calls 6 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If you lift the handset before pressing a line or pool button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or pool or the intercom The order in which the system makes th
477. tomatic System Answer Button 111 Use this feature to program a button to turn Automatic System Answer ASA on and off This feature helps the operator answer calls during busy periods Considerations m This feature is available only on the system telephone at extension 10 m Program an Automatic System Answer Button on a button with lights on the system display telephone at extension 10 This feature is not supported on a button without lights m The Automatic System Answer Button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used a Direct Extension Dial is an alternative system answering feature that lets outside callers dial an extension or Hunt Group number directly without the aid of the operator Programming To assign or unassign an Automatic System Answer Button with lights at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AMM Automatic System Answer Features 7 4 Operator Features Do one of the following If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 1 Assigned Ext10 If you want to unassign Automatic System Answer press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 2 Not Assigned Y If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears
478. ton 9 21 identifying extensions 9 23 inappropriate answering 9 15 setting up 9 16 fax line saver 9 18 send and receive machines 9 19 single machine 9 16 transferring calls to 9 15 manual 9 15 voice and fax on same line 9 22 Fax Management button 9 21 Fax Management feature 9 21 Feature Telephones 6 12 features dial codes A 3 intercom dial codes A 4 number codes A 1 Release 2 0 or later Release 3 0 or later system programming A 1 ferrite core 9 35 Follow Me 8 11 Forced Account Code Entry 3 13 4 28 Forced Account Code List 3 13 4 29 Forced Account Code List 409 4 29 Forced Account Codes 4 27 Forwarding Calls 8 11 5 Slot Carrier 1 3 1 3 Index configuration overview 1 7 G GCD see Group Call Distribution Grounding the system 2 12 Group Call Distribution 206 4 33 Group Calling Ring Page 8 34 using single line telephone 8 36 system telephone 8 35 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 8 37 using single line telephone 8 39 system telephone 8 38 Group Paging 8 34 Group Pickup 8 39 using single line telephone 8 40 system telephone 8 40 Groups calling 4 30 8 34 hunt 4 31 8 37 night service 4 34 paging 8 35 pickup 4 35 8 39 H handling calls 6 15 Handset for hard of hearing 9 2 using 6 7 volume controls 6 9 handset 6 8 Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI 6 8 Hardware 1 7 1 12 headsets 9 1 help finding 11 1 HFAI see Hands Free Answ
479. tons with lights Number of programmable buttons without lights Key mode line button capacity Hybrid mode pool button capacity Line capacity Intercom buttons Display Speakerphone 1 The main pool uses two buttons 2 The system supports a maximum of 19 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines you can use up to 19 buttons on these telephones for outside lines 3 The system supports a maximum of 19 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines you can use up to 16 buttons on these telephones for outside lines 32 16 16 4 Vv Lights Each line or pool button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information Table 6 2 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment System Telephones 6 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table 6 2 Light Patterns on System Telephones Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Button Steady On Off steady off Flash long on long off Alternating Red Green Flash Wink long on short off Line is in use
480. tore a file that was created with an incompatible software release What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again by using a backup file that was created with the current software release Problems with System Restore 11 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode NOTE This display indicates that all system and telephone programming has reverted to the default settings Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the restore was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the Backup Restore PC Card reapply power to the system and restart the Restore Programming 125 procedure Possible Cause 2 The backup file is corrupted What to do Retry the Restore Programming 125 procedure If you get the same result try again by using a different backup file from the same Backup Restore PC Card or a file from a different Backup Restore PC Card Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards System Programming Settings Reverted to Default Settings Possible Cause You ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure but the restore failed What to do See Possible Causes 1 and 2 under Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two
481. try standard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature telephones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system Certain single line telephones are recommended because of their compatibility with the Message Waiting light capability of the system See the Customer Support Document provided on the documentation compact disc for a list of these recommended telephones NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect single line telephones with LED compatible message waiting lights to a processor module a 308EC module or to a Release 3 0 R3 0 or later 206 module This message waiting capability is not supported for single line telephones with neon type message waiting lights Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional telephone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many industry standara tip ring devices work with the system regardless of the manufacturer Auxiliary equipment also includes voice messaging systems The following are supported by the PARTNER ACS m PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System PMVS m PARTNER Voice Messaging PVM PC Card m The PARTNER MAIL system For more information see Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment or contact your local Authorized Dealer System Components 1 12 Installation 2 Contents OVEIMIEW a otc ee ae oe eS a
482. ts over the loudspeaker For example a supermarket installs a hotline telephone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline telephone the butcher s telephone rings If the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline telephone Considerations m The same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline and a doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension cancels the doorphone setting m You should not assign hotline telephones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules which are reserved as power failure extensions m The hotline telephone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the telephone rings m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline telephone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the hotline extension Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only m Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 m Use External Hotline 311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset Programming To
483. ts ringing at each extension that has the line Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with tip ring telephones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables tip ring telephones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on tip ring telephones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Assigning Lines 3 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Pooled Extensions Release 2 0 or later If your system will be configured for Hybrid mode use the features described in this section to change the assignment of lines in pools to assign auxiliary pools to pooled extensions or to remove the main pool from pooled extensions If a pooled extension also has an individual line see Key Extensions above to assign that individual line After you program the Number of Lines to assign lines to the main pool use the following features as needed a Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines from the main pool and assign lines to auxiliary pools m Line Access Mode 313 to chan
484. tteries in the Processor Module on page 2 12 for instructions for replacing the batteries Backup Failure Alarm messages appear if an automatic backup is unsuccessful The message is displayed until you clear the alarm or until the next successful automatic backup or system restart See Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 3 Considerations Display 6 14 The call timer records the time a user is active on a call It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle and ends when either the handset is placed back in the cradle or the call is placed on hold This is not the call duration reported to SMDR SMDR records the total time the call is in progress including the time a call is placed on hold For more information see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR on page 9 32 When a call is transferred the timer restarts when the call is answered The call timer is displayed along with the factory set display Most messages other than the factory set display and Caller ID are displayed for approximately 15 seconds Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not appear when they are dialed Adjust the display contrast by pressing and then using the up volume control button to increase the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle You can adjust the angle of the display to three posi
485. ttings Any extensions that would normally ring during the day also ring Considerations Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline telephones or doorphones in the Night Service Group m A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s telephone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service Group can vary from one extension to another m If you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers without entering the System Password m If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s telephones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting w Groups of Extensions 4 34 Programming System Options 4 To assign or unassign another
486. tton for this extension or exit programming mode PF oO Dn Using Caller ID Name Display Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on press it again to turn it off Conference Drop F06 Use this feature to drop the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Considerations m You can program a Conference Drop button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch m This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Conference Drop button 1 Press Feature D 0 2 Press a programmable button Conference Drop F06 8 26 3 4 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Press 00 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Conference Drop on a System Telephone Press the programmed button or Feature 0 6 The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Using Conference Drop on a Single Line Telephone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference Contact Closure F41 and F42 The system can drive an optional Contact Closure Adjunct with two Contact Closures to operate auxiliary devices such as electronic door locks If the System Administrator has assigned your extension to a Contact Closure Group for one or both of these Contact Closures you can activate the Contact Closure from your t
487. ule 3 Attach the other end of the wire to the approved earth ground such as building steel or a cold water pipe Figure 2 12 Grounding Screw Locations Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module The processor module uses two AAA size standard alkaline batteries to guard against the loss of system programming in case of a power failure These batteries retain the system programming for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries You should replace the batteries every year A CAUTION Batteries and battery cover are packaged in a separate box If you are replacing batteries the old batteries must be removed with the power on or the system s memory will be lost Follow these steps to insert the batteries 1 Locate the battery compartment at the bottom of the PARTNER ACS processor module below the extension jacks Installing the Control Unit 2 12 Installation 2 Push gently on the battery icon the locking latch and slide the battery icon up to cover the plus icon this unlocks the battery assembly see Figure 2 13 3 Remove the battery assembly by gently pulling the tab at the bottom of the battery compartment cover Locked Position Unlocked Position Figure 2 13 Locked and Unlocked Positions 4 Insert two new AAA size standard alkaline batteries into the metal battery clips by pushing them straight in placing the negative
488. umber listed on the front inside cover If you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 7 Possible Cause 7 Local telephone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from each 206 308EC 400 and 200 module in the control unit Then plug each line into a single line telephone and try to make a call m If the trouble occurs on the single line telephone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local telephone company m If the trouble does not occur on the single line telephone the trouble is with your control unit Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions Trouble making outside calls from a pool button can be one of the following situations m You hear nothing at all m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone cuts off when you try to dial Other Telephone Problems 11 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m You hear a reorder or busy signal if you try to dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 at intercom dial tone m You notice that the red light next to a pool button is on steady most or all of the time indicating that the pool is busy Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out
489. unications System installation Programming and Use Z caution The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it 10 Move the On Off switch to the On position 11 Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit m fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide 12 Make sure all modules are seated properly The cover will not fit if the modules are not seated properly 13 To replace the cover grasp it by its upper edges and hold it squarely over the control unit Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place 14 Tighten the screw on the lower front of the cover Replacing Modules Replacing system modules is similar to how you originally installed modules into the control unit The procedure varies slightly between the stand alone 2 slot carrier configuration and the 5 slot carrier configuration Replacing Modules in a Stand Alone or 2 Slot Carrier Configuration Z caution Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing t
490. unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension Lift the handset to reconnect to the caller To make a voice signaled transfer to a system telephone in Step 2 above press plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Ifyou hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call and the
491. up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you used an Auto Dial button the green light next to the button flutters To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Dial ntercom 6 2 Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension where the call is parked Call Park 8 14 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Call Park on a Single Line Telephone To park a call 1 While on a call press the switchhook or Recall The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone Dial your two digit extension number 3 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you are on another call when the parked call returns you will not receive notification even if Call Waiting is assigned to your extension The parked call rings back when your telephone is idle To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 and the extension number where the call is parked Call Pickup 16XX Use this feature to answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension where XX is a system extension number This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Considerations m You can program a Call Pickup button on a system telephone to pick up with one touch a call that is ringing or parked at a
492. ure MO If the telephone is idle you hear Background Music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on To adjust the volume of Background Music use the telephone s volume control buttons while listening to the Background Music To turn Background Music off press the programmed button or press Feature MO If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later Use this feature to redirect all intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is a system extension number for coverage When Call Coverage is activated covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings Callers can then leave a message with the person at the covering extension This feature helps users who want their callers to have personalized service when they are unable to answer calls Considerations Use a system display telephone for the covering extension so the user can identify coverage calls Coverage Call for XX appears on the display when a coverage call rings at a covering extension instead of Caller ID information if available If the covering extension has an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the light shows green flutter while the coverage call is ringing at the covering extension If the user at the extension lifts the handset he o
493. ures With the Direct Line Pickup features you can access a ringing or held call or a call in progress You can also select a line to use that is not assigned to your telephone The Direct Line Pickup features are Direct Line Pickup Active Line Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Direct Line Pickup Active Line 168LL Use this feature to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a system line number This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line that is not assigned to the telephone Considerations This feature is useful when you are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on your telephone You cannot access conference calls by using this feature You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system telephone to pick up a line by pressing the button and then dialing the two digit line number If a line is idle you cannot access it with this feature you hear busy tone For information about accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup ldle Line If Line Access Restriction or pool Access Restriction is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line when the line is ringing at another extension The user can join a call
494. us Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 m You can include special functions such as a Pause in the Auto Dial number m An Auto Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting m You cannot use Auto Dialing with Call Screening F25 Programming To program an Auto Dial button 1 Press Feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button Auto Dialing 8 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 Enter an account code PBX Centrex feature access code or one of the following Outside telephone number Enter the telephone number up to 28 digits exactly as you would dial it Extension number Press the left button and enter the two digit extension number Press x before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling press 00 Feature code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press oga When you press the programmed button the Message Light at extension 20 turns on 4 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode Using Auto Dialing From a system telephone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press Sekr but you do not have to do so
495. voice signaled call to a single line telephone or an MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone it rings instead Consider the following System Telephones 6 8 Using the Telephones m The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your telephone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the call m If HFAI is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they ring instead m If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension it may result in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call to that extension Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 feature activated When you use Voice Interrupt On Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your system telephone has a sensitive sound activated
496. voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN MODULES To install the control unit you must do the following Wall mount the control unit m Label the jacks Ground the system m Insert the batteries into the processor module m Initialize the system m Check the LEDs on the modules m Install the cover 5 slot carrier only Wall Mounting the Control Unit The PARTNER Advanced Communications System can be installed in one of three configurations m Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module m 2 Slot Carrier which can hold up to two modules m 5 Slot Carrier which can hold up to five modules and includes a cover Installing the Control Unit 2 4 Installation Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier Install the processor module within 5 feet 1 5 meters of a properly grounded wall outlet not controlled by a switch and the network interface jacks Follow these steps to wall mount the module s 1 Using the enclosed template mark the screw locations on the wall 2 Hold the processor module against the wall gt with the line and extension jacks facing left 4 Leave at least 1 foot 0 3 meters clearance at the top front and right side and at least 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side see Figure 2 1 This allows you to access the jacks or expand the system with another module and ensures adequate ventilation
497. wer cord from the wall outlet _ Loosen the screw on the lower front of the cover PF oO Dn Place one hand on the handle on the bottom front of the cover and place your other hand on the top of the cover and gently pull the cover up and away from the carrier Be careful not to break the tabs that attach the cover to the carrier 5 Before installing a module remove the clear plastic protector from the connector area on the rear of the module by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 10 4 Adding New Modules 10 4 Upgrading the System Tab e Gi Tab Figure 10 4 Removing the Plastic Protector 6 Before you insert the new module make sure that all 400 or 200 modules are installed to the right of all 308EC or 206 modules see Figure 10 5 If you need to move a module to accommodate the new one see Replacing Modules Figure 10 5 Placement of Modules 7 Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks into place and is attached to the rear of the carrier Do not force the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it 8 Connect line and or extension jack cords to the new module see Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 9 Reconnect the power cord to the wall outlet Adding New Modules 10 5 PARTNER Advanced Comm
498. were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do Try Backup Programming Manual 124 later when the system is idle or during nonbusiness hours Problems with Manual Backup 11 20 Troubleshooting Problems with System Restore Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a restore by using Restore Programming 125 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted a restore and the file was corrupted What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again with a different backup file Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You selected a file named AUTO or MAN for the restore The file is empty no backups have been stored in it yet What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again by using a backed up file Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted to res
499. works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Call Records Wrap on SMDR Printout Possible Cause SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits causing the combined length of the fields for a call record to be greater than the 80 characters supported by your printer What to do Reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer m If the call records print without wrapping to the next line the problem is solved m If the problem remains change the output format back to 15 digits Problems with Tip Ring Devices 11 16 Troubleshooting Problems with Automatic Backup Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card while trying to do an automatic backup What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 You must have addition
500. xtension for each type of telephone in the system Then use Copy Settings 399 to program other telephones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D telephone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 telephones See Copy Settings 399 on page 4 15 for more information Customizing Extensions 3 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services Your system may work behind a PBX or Centrex system m PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch m Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex features to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information about using Centrex features see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Consider the following when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system m Recall setting m Dialing restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers Recall Setting Set the Recall Timer Duration 107 to match the setting us
501. xtension from the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Coverage off If Call Coverage and Do Not Disturb are active covered calls are routed immediately to the covering extension without ringing the covered extension You can turn on Call Coverage while a call is ringing to send a call immediately for coverage Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call immediately for coverage See Send All Calls If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For transferred calls If the covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings If the cove
502. xtension number and repeat above steps Display Language Dial 0 Dial a system extension Dial 1 English Y 2 Spanish 3 French Press to program another extension Automatic Extension Privacy Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Press to program another extension Abbreviated Ringing Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 1 ring Y 2 Not Active repeated ringing Press to program another extension Transfer Return Extension Dial OO Dial a system extension Dial of extension 10 57 to which call should return if not answered Extension transferring call Y Press to program another extension Forced Account Code Entry Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press to program another extension Distinctive Ringing Dial O Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y Press to program another extension Intercom Dial Tone Dial 0o Dial a system extension Dial 1 Regular 2 Machine Y Press to program another extension Automatic VMS Cover Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press to program another extension External Hotline Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press to program another extension Voice Interrupt On Busy Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press to program anot
503. xtensions Installing telephones Connecting auxiliary equipment If your company already has modular jacks for all outside lines and extensions you may be able to use the existing wiring to install the system hardware and connect telephones to the system yourself Overview 2 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Evaluating the Environment Before you begin the physical installation of the system you must check that all environmental factors are within the acceptable ranges as shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Specification Value Environmental E Requirements Control Unit Electrical C Requirements Control Unit a Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit 5 slot carrier 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom 2 slot carrier or Stand alone ACS processor module 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the front top and right side and 2 feet 0
504. y call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Telephone Problems 11 6 Troubleshooting Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The caller used a star code 67 to block Caller ID information or has instructed the telephone company to block Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is the normal operation for these conditions is Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The call originated outside the area for which the telephone company can provide Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is normal operation for the Caller ID service Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Possible Cause Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local telephone company What to do lf Caller ID information for a large number of calls is not displayed contact your local telephone company Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of Intercom Autodialer What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer on page 2 24 for instructions m If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power What to do Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged in
505. you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers To Program To program the system for an answering machine 1 Do one of the following m Ifyou use only one answering machine do one of the following If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover lf extension X is a pooled extension use Line Extension Assignment 314 to assign all the pools to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover m Ifyou use more than one answering machine a If your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Access Mode 313 to change extensions X and Y from Pooled to Key Answering Machines 9 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use b Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that you want the machines to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extensions X and Y to Immediate Ring 3 Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 4 Adjust the answering machine s to answer according to your needs For example set the mac
506. your extension You are part of a joined call Joining Calls You are part of a Conference Call You are recording a call by using Record a Call F24 You are screening a call by using Call Screening F25 Using Voice Interrupt On Busy To initiate a Voice Interrupt On Busy call Voice Interrupt Features 8 64 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 1 From a system telephone press intercom 2 Press x plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button 3 Listen for one of the following responses m f you hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call ma If you hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a system telephone that is idle has Do Not Disturb turned off and ha

PARTNER Advanced Communications System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents